You are on page 1of 221

Honeywell Materials License Agreement

The documents and information contained herein (“the Materials”) are the proprietary data of Honeywell
International Inc. and Honeywell Intellectual Properties Inc (collectively “Honeywell”). These Materials are
provided for the exclusive use of Honeywell Service Centers; Honeywell-authorized repair facilities; operators of
Honeywell aerospace products subject to an applicable product support agreement, their wholly owned-subsidiaries
or a formally designated third party service provider thereunder; and direct recipients of Materials from
Honeywell’s Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement
govern your use of these Materials, except to the extent that any terms and conditions of another applicable
agreement with Honeywell regarding the operation, maintenance, or repair of Honeywell aerospace products
conflict with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, in which case the terms and conditions of the other
agreement will govern. However, this License Agreement will govern in the event of a conflict between its terms and
conditions and those of a purchase order or acknowledgement.

1. License Grant
If you are a party to an applicable product support agreement, a Honeywell Service Center agreement, or an authorized repair facility
agreement, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use these Materials to operate, maintain, or repair Honeywell
aerospace products only in accordance with that agreement.

If you are a direct recipient of these Materials from Honeywell’s Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution and are not a party to an
agreement related to the operation, maintenance or repair of Honeywell aerospace products, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-
exclusive license to use these Materials to maintain or repair the subject Honeywell aerospace products only at the facility to which these
Materials have been shipped ("the Licensed Facility"). Transfer of the Materials to another facility owned by you is permitted only if the
original Licensed Facility retains no copies of the Materials and you provide prior written notice to Honeywell.

2. Rights In Materials - Honeywell retains all rights in these Materials and in any copies thereof that are not expressly granted to you,
including all rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets. No license to use any Honeywell trademarks or patents is
granted under this License Agreement.

3. Confidentiality - You acknowledge that these Materials contain information that is confidential and proprietary to Honeywell. You
agree to take all reasonable efforts to maintain the confidentiality of these Materials.

4. Assignment And Transfer - This License Agreement may be assigned to a formally designated service designee to the extent
allowed under an applicable product support agreement or transferred to a subsequent owner or operator of an aircraft containing the
subject Honeywell aerospace products. However, the recipient of any such assignment or transfer must assume all of your obligations
under this License Agreement. No assignment or transfer shall relieve any party of any obligation that such party then has hereunder.

5. Copies of Materials - Unless you have the express written permission of Honeywell, you may not make or permit making of copies
of the Materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may make copies of only portions of the Material for your internal use. You agree
to return the Materials and any copies thereof to Honeywell upon the request of Honeywell.

6. Term - This License Agreement is effective until terminated as set forth herein. This License Agreement will terminate immediately,
without notice from Honeywell, if you fail to comply with any provision of this License Agreement or will terminate simultaneously with
the termination or expiration of your applicable product support agreement, authorized repair facility agreement, or your formal
designation as a third party service provider. Upon termination of this License Agreement, you will return these Materials to Honeywell
without retaining any copies and will have one of your authorized officers certify that all Materials have been returned with no copies
retained.

7. Remedies - Honeywell reserves the right to pursue all available remedies and damages resulting from a breach of this License
Agreement.

8. Limitation of Liability - IN NO EVENT WILL HONEYWELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SPECIAL DAMAGES, INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUES, OR
LOSS OF USE, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER LIABILITY
ARISES FROM BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NEGLIGENCE), BY
OPERATION OF LAW, OR OTHERWISE.

9. Controlling Law - This License shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York without
regard to the conflicts of laws provisions thereof. This license sets forth the entire agreement between you and Honeywell and may only
be modified by a writing duly executed by the duly authorized representatives of the parties.

(Rev 05/05)
IMPORTANT - PLEASE READ

"These commodities, technology or software were exported


from the United States in accordance with the Export
Administration Regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law
prohibited."
PDM Controlled InterleafDocument File, Received On 10/21/2005 13:14:07

Honeywell International Inc.


Aircraft Landing Systems (CAGE 55284)
3520 Westmoor Street
South Bend, Indiana 46628Ć1373
https://pubs.cas.honeywell.com

737-200/300/400/500
MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY

PART NUMBERS 2606671-1, 2606671-2 AND 2606671-3

COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL


with ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

NOTICE: This is a reprint. All basic and


revised pages have been combined into one
document replacing Publication No. 12-558
and revisions thereto.

PAGE T-1
NOVEMBER 30, 1979
PUBLICATION NO. 12-558 32-40-09 REVISION 14 - OCTOBER 14, 2005

File: 12-558.ildoc, Revision: 14, Status: Released, Released On 10/21/2005


COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671

TO: Holders of Component Maintenance Manual (12-558) for the Aircraft Landing Systems
(ALS) Main Wheel Assembly used on the 737-200/300/400/500 Aircraft.
REVISION #14, OCTOBER 14, 2005
HIGHLIGHTS
Pages revised are listed below, together with the revision highlights. Due to the quantity of pages af-
fected, the basic manual and any revisions have been combined and reprinted. Discard all previous
pages of the manual, Publication No. 12-558, and replace with the attached pages.

Chapter/Section/Subject
and Page Number Description of Change
32-40-09
INTRO-1 The highlighted procedure and Table 1 were revised.
1 The metric conversion value was added to the leading particulars table.
Paragraph 1.A. was revised. In Paragraph 1.D., the address was revised.
2 Paragraph 1.F. was added. In Step 2.A.(1), the figure reference was
updated.
3 Table 1 was added.
4 Figure 1 was added.
5 Figure 2 was added.
6 Figure reference in figure caption was changed from 1 to 3.
7 In Step 3.B.(1), the metric conversion value was added.
8 In Step 3.C.(4), the description was added to acronym “TSO”. In Step
4.A.(2)(a), the figure references were updated.
9 Figure reference in figure caption was changed from 2 to 4.
10 In Step 5.A.(1), the description was added to acronym “NDT”.
102 Outline number 1.1, A.(4) was revised. In outline number 1.1, D., the
description for acronym “TPIS” was corrected.
103 Outline number 2.1, B. was revised.
105 In Figure 101, the “Weight” data for “Rotor alignment guide” was corrected.
303 Outline number 3.1, B. was revised. In CAUTION preceding outline number
3.1, C., the paragraph reference was corrected. The CAUTION preceding
outline number 3.1, D. was revised.
304 In the first NOTE preceding outline number 4.2, C., the paragraph reference
was corrected.
401 In outline numbers 1.1, A. and 2.1, A., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
402 In Figure 401, the section references for SPM were removed.
501 In Paragraph 2., the section reference for SPM was removed.
503 In Paragraph 4., the description corresponding to “Deflated Tire” was revised
and the section reference was removed from the description corresponding
to “Fuse Release”.

Page 1 of 4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671

505 In Paragraph 5., the CAUTION was revised.


506 Paragraph 6. was revised.
508 The CAUTION following outline number 1.1 was added.
509 In the NOTE following outline number 2.1, the paragraph reference was
corrected. In outline number 2.3, the description for acronym “TPIS” was
corrected.
511 Figure 501 was revised.
513 In outline number 3.0, the CAUTION was revised and in the first NOTE, the
section reference for SPM was removed.
514 Outline numbers 3.1 and 3.2 were revised.
515 Figure 502 was revised.
516 The NOTE following outline number 3.4 was revised. Outline numbers 3.5
and 3.8 were revised.
518 In NOTES and outline numbers 4.3 and 4.4, the section reference for SPM
was removed.
519 In outline numbers 4.6 and 4.7, the section reference for SPM was removed.
Outline numbers 4.8 and 4.9 were revised. In outline number 5.4, the metric
conversion value was updated.
520 In outline numbers 6.2 and 6.5, the section reference for SPM was removed.
522 Figure 504 was revised.
523 The two NOTES following outline number 7.0 were revised.
524 In outline numbers 8.1, 8.2, 9.1, and 9.2, the section reference for SPM was
removed.
525 In Paragraph J., the title was corrected.
601 Paragraph 1. was revised.
602 In outline number 1.1, the second NOTE was added. In outline number 1.1,
E., the section reference for SPM was removed. In outline number 1.1, H.,
the reference to outline number 3.21 was added.
604 In outline number 2.2, C., the section reference for SPM was removed. In
outline number 2.2, E., the section reference for SPM was removed and the
reference to outline number 2.25 was added.
606 In Figure 602 (Sheet 2 of 2), the metric conversion value was corrected.
614 In outline number 2.5, C., the section reference for SPM was removed.
616 In outline numbers 2.6, D., E., and H., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
618 In outline numbers 2.7, B. and C., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
620 Figure 610 was revised.
622 In outline number 2.8, E., the section reference for SPM was removed.
626 In outline numbers 2.9, C. and D., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
628 Outline number 2.10, A. was revised. In outline number 2.10, E., the metric
conversion value was corrected.

Page 2 of 4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671

629 Figure 614 was revised.


631 In Figure 615, the reference to Diameter “C” and its data were corrected.
635 In Figure 617, the metric conversion values were corrected.
636 Figure 618 was revised.
640 In outline number 2.18, B., the section reference for SPM was removed.
646 In outline number 2.21, A., the section reference for SPM was removed.
647 Figure 624 was revised.
648 In outline number 2.24, C., the section reference for SPM was removed.
649 Figure 625 was revised.
650 In outline numbers 2.25, A. and 2.26, B., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
654 In outline number 3.2, C., the section reference for SPM was removed. In
outline number 3.2, E., the section reference for SPM was removed and the
reference to outline number 3.22 was added.
656 In Figure 628 (Sheet 2 of 2), the metric conversion value was corrected.
660 In outline number 3.4, C., the section reference for SPM was removed.
661 In Figure 631, the figure caption was corrected.
662 In outline numbers 3.5, D., E., and H., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
664 In outline number 3.6, B. and C., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
666 Figure 634 was revised.
668 In outline number 3.7, E., the section reference for SPM was removed.
670 In outline number 3.9, E., the metric conversion value was corrected.
671 Figure 637 was revised.
672 In outline number 3.10, E., the section reference for SPM was removed.
677 In Figure 641, the metric conversion values were corrected.
678 Figure 642 was revised. In Figure 642, the reference to Dimensions “G” and
“H” were corrected.
682 In outline numbers 3.18, B.(1) and (9), the section reference for SPM was
removed. In outline number 3.18, B.(4), the description for acronym “GTAW”
was removed.
684 In outline number 3.19, G., the metric conversion value was corrected.
686 In outline number 3.21, C., the section reference for SPM was removed.
687 Figure 647 was revised.
688 In outline numbers 3.22, A. and 3.23, B., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
690 In outline number 5.1, B., the section reference for SPM was removed.
691 In outline number 6.1, B., the section reference for SPM was removed.
702 In outline numbers 1.1, C., (2) and (3), the section reference for SPM was
removed.

Page 3 of 4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671

703 In outline number 2.1, A.(2), the section reference for SPM was removed.
704 Outline number 2.1, C.(5) and the succeeding NOTE were deleted.
708 In outline numbers 4.1, D., E., and G., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
710 In outline numbers 6.1, A. and 7.1, A., the section reference for SPM was
removed.
801 In Figure 801, the torque value was updated and the CAUTION was revised.
903 Added Figure 905.
904 Added Figure 906.
905 Added Figure 907.
1001 In Paragraph 8., the address for vendor Code 55284 was updated.
1003 Figure 1 was revised.
1005 In figure item 26, the figure reference in nomenclature was corrected.
1006 In figure item 95B, the nomenclature was revised.
1008 Figure items 115F, 155G, and 115H were added. Figure item 125 was
changed to “not illustrated”. Figure item 125B was changed to “illustrated”.
1011 In figure item 181B, the figure reference in nomenclature was corrected.
A-1 The vendor Code “33564” was added and the address was updated.
A-2 Vendor Code 67027 was deleted.
A-4 The vendor addresses for vendor Code 55284 were updated.
A-6 In Appendix-B section reference, the highlighted vendor addresses were
updated.
B-1 Paragraph 1. was revised.
B-8 Figure B-3 was revised.
B-9 Figure B-4 was revised.
B-10 Figure B-5 was revised.
B-13 Outline number 2.7, D. was revised. In the first NOTE following outline
number 2.7, D.(5), the metric conversion value was corrected. The second
NOTE following outline number 2.7, D.(5) was revised.
B-14 In outline number 2.7, D.(7), the description was added to acronym “NDT”.
B-17 Figure B-6 was revised.
B-18 Outline number 3.4, A. was revised.

Page 4 of 4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Issue Date Issue Date
Rev. No. Date Inserted By Rev. No. Date Inserted By
1 9/30/80 9/30/80 ABSD
2 1/31/82 8/7/84 ABSD
3 12/1/84 12/1/84 ABSD
4 8/15/85 4/15/86 ABSD
5 2/15/86 4/15/86 ABSD
6 4/15/86 4/15/86 ABSD
7 8/15/89 5/15/90 BWBD
8 5/15/90 5/15/90 BWBD
9 3/31/92 7/15/92 BWBD
10 7/15/92 7/15/92 BWBD
11 2/29/00 3/31/03 ALS
12 3/31/03 3/31/03 ALS
13 4/30/04 4/30/04 ALS
14 10/14/05 10/14/05 ALS

Page RR-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
RECORD OF REVISIONS

This page intentionally left blank.

Page RR-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
TEMP. REV. PAGE ISSUE DATE
NO. NUMBERS DATE BY REMOVED BY

Page RTR-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

This page intentionally left blank.

Page RTR-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
The following list contains Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS) Service Bulletins (SBs) with issue dates
and the dates the information was incorporated in the Component Maintenance Manual.

NOTE: ALS Service Information Letters (SILs) are normally issued to provide general information.
However, certain SILs may contain additional procedural or modification information which
was disseminated to the equipment user. Therefore, these SILs are listed along with the
SBs.

Date
SB/SIL Number SB/SIL Title Date Issued Incorporated
2606671-32-028 Main Landing Gear - Wheel Assembly - 05/21/93 02/29/00
737 - Introduction of Optional Grease Seal
P/N 2610036, Into Outboard Wheel Half
Assembly P/N 2607949-1
415 Clarification of old and new balancing pro- 10/01/81 12/01/84
cedures for all Bendix wheels, and elimina-
tion of confusion resulting from old proce-
dures
422 Wheel/Tire Interface Damage With Com- 10/29/82 12/01/84
pound Bead Seat Radius Wheel Assemblies
425 Introduction of a new Inboard Main Wheel 10/20/82 12/01/84
Half P/N 2608245, for Wheel Assembly P/N
2606671-1
432 Federal-Mogul Bower Bearings 12/17/82 12/01/84
438 Prevention of Wheel Tubewell Chafing by 03/19/84 05/15/90
Heat Shields, on all 737 HW Wheels
P/N 2606671-1
456 Modification of Wheel Assembly 04/17/86 05/15/90
P/N 2606671-1 (SCD-10-61819-13) to
P/N 2606671-3 (SCD-10-61819-23)
470 Commercial Use of H-11 Steel Tie Bolts 04/28/87 05/15/90
473 Wheel Bearing Lubrication 07/07/87 05/15/90
474 Discontinuance Of Use of Rupture Disk, 01/22/88 05/15/90
P/N 2605134, For Wheel Safety Relief
Valve Service Repair on the following
Bendix Wheel Equipped Aircraft: B727,
B737, B747, B767, MD-82/83, A300-600,
and A310
475 Aircraft Wheel Bearing Roller End Scoring 12/14/87 05/15/90
476 Lining Quality 01/29/88 05/15/90
628 Introduction of Polyurethane Paint on B737 11/05/97 08/31/00
Main Wheels P/N 2606671-2 and
P/N 2609801-1
653 Screw Thread Insert, P/N 2600715 03/15/99 02/29/00
Page SBL-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
Date
SB/SIL Number SB/SIL Title Date Issued Incorporated
662, Supplement 3 737-200/300/400/500 Main Wheel Tie Bolt 07/25/01 03/31/03
Recommendations
674 Caution to Avoid Installation of Incorrect 01/20/00 03/31/03
Wheel Bearing
689 Introduction of Self-Locking Rotor Drive Key 06/05/00 03/31/03
Screw, P/N 2614478 With Torque Drive Fea-
ture
712 Introduction of Rotor Drive Key Screw, 04/20/01 03/31/03
P/N 2614477 With Torque Drive Feature
726 Introduction of Rotor Drive Key Screw, 08/30/01 03/31/03
P/N 2614477 With Torque Drive Feature
732, Supplement 1 Ultrasonic Wheel Hub Inspection 08/31/02 04/30/04
792, Supplement 1 Wheel Balancing, Main and Nose 02/25/04 10/14/05
Wheels - All Models
821 737-200/300/400/500 and 737-400 HGW 06/10/05 10/14/05
Main Wheel Tie Bolt Torque Increase

Page SBL-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Title Page T-1 Oct 14/05 Check (cont.) 503 Oct 14/05
Record of RR-1 Oct 14/05 504 Oct 14/05
Revisions RR-2 Blank 505 Oct 14/05
506 Oct 14/05
Record of RTR-1 Oct 14/05 507 Blank
Temporary RTR-2 Blank 508 Oct 14/05
Revisions 509 Oct 14/05
Service Bulletin SBL-1 Oct 14/05 510 Oct 14/05
List SBL-2 Blank 511 Oct 14/05
List of LEP-1 Oct 14/05 512 Blank
Effective Pages LEP-2 Oct 14/05 513 Oct 14/05
LEP-3 Oct 14/05 514 Oct 14/05
LEP-4 Blank 515 Oct 14/05
516 Oct 14/05
Table of TC-1 Oct 14/05
517 Oct 14/05
Contents TC-2 Blank
518 Oct 14/05
Introduction INTRO-1 Oct 14/05 519 Oct 14/05
INTRO-2 Blank 520 Oct 14/05
Description and 1 Oct 14/05 521 Oct 14/05
Operation 2 Oct 14/05 522 Oct 14/05
3 Oct 14/05 523 Oct 14/05
4 Oct 14/05 524 Oct 14/05
5 Oct 14/05 525 Oct 14/05
6 Oct 14/05 526 Oct 14/05
7 Oct 14/05 Repair 601 Oct 14/05
8 Oct 14/05 602 Oct 14/05
9 Oct 14/05 603 Oct 14/05
10 Oct 14/05 604 Oct 14/05
Testing 101 Oct 14/05 605 Oct 14/05
102 Oct 14/05 606 Oct 14/05
103 Oct 14/05 607 Blank
104 Oct 14/05 608 Oct 14/05
105 Oct 14/05 609 Oct 14/05
106 Blank 610 Oct 14/05
Disassembly 301 Oct 14/05 611 Blank
302 Oct 14/05 612 Oct 14/05
303 Oct 14/05 613 Oct 14/05
304 Oct 14/05 614 Oct 14/05
615 Blank
Cleaning 401 Oct 14/05 616 Oct 14/05
402 Oct 14/05 617 Oct 14/05
Check 501 Oct 14/05 618 Oct 14/05
502 Oct 14/05 619 Oct 14/05

Copyright 1997, 1980, 1982, 1984, 1985,


1986, 1990, 1992, 2000, 2003, 2004, 2005
Honeywell International Inc.
Aircraft Landing Systems Page LEP-1
South Bend, Indiana 46628, U.S.A.
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Repair (cont.) 620 Oct 14/05 Repair (cont.) 663 Oct 14/05
621 Oct 14/05 664 Oct 14/05
622 Oct 14/05 665 Oct 14/05
623 Oct 14/05 666 Oct 14/05
624 Oct 14/05 667 Oct 14/05
625 Blank 668 Oct 14/05
626 Oct 14/05 669 Oct 14/05
627 Oct 14/05 670 Oct 14/05
628 Oct 14/05 671 Oct 14/05
629 Oct 14/05 672 Oct 14/05
630 Oct 14/05 673 Oct 14/05
631 Oct 14/05 674 Oct 14/05
632 Oct 14/05 675 Oct 14/05
633 Blank 676 Oct 14/05
634 Oct 14/05 677 Oct 14/05
635 Oct 14/05 678 Oct 14/05
636 Oct 14/05 679 Oct 14/05
637 Oct 14/05 680 Oct 14/05
638 Oct 14/05 681 Oct 14/05
639 Blank 682 Oct 14/05
640 Oct 14/05 683 Oct 14/05
641 Oct 14/05 684 Oct 14/05
642 Oct 14/05 685 Oct 14/05
643 Oct 14/05 686 Oct 14/05
644 Oct 14/05 687 Oct 14/05
645 Blank 688 Oct 14/05
646 Oct 14/05 689 Oct 14/05
647 Oct 14/05 690 Oct 14/05
648 Oct 14/05 691 Oct 14/05
649 Oct 14/05 692 Oct 14/05
650 Oct 14/05 693 Oct 14/05
651 Oct 14/05 694 Oct 14/05
652 Oct 14/05 695 Blank
653 Oct 14/05 696 Oct 14/05
654 Oct 14/05 697 Oct 14/05
655 Oct 14/05 698 Blank
656 Oct 14/05 Assembly 701 Oct 14/05
657 Blank 702 Oct 14/05
658 Oct 14/05 703 Oct 14/05
659 Oct 14/05 704 Oct 14/05
660 Oct 14/05 705 Blank
661 Oct 14/05 706 Oct 14/05
662 Oct 14/05

Page LEP-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE
Assembly (cont.) 707 Oct 14/05 Appendix A A-1 Oct 14/05
708 Oct 14/05 Appendix A (cont.) A-2 Oct 14/05
709 Oct 14/05 A-3 Oct 14/05
710 Oct 14/05 A-4 Oct 14/05
Fits and 801 Oct 14/05 A-5 Oct 14/05
Clearances 802 Blank A-6 Oct 14/05
Special Tools, 901 Oct 14/05 Appendix B B-1 Oct 14/05
Fixtures, and 902 Oct 14/05 B-2 Oct 14/05
Equipment 903 Oct 14/05 B-3 Blank
904 Oct 14/05 B-4 Oct 14/05
905 Oct 14/05 B-5 Oct 14/05
906 Blank B-6 Oct 14/05
Illustrated Parts 1001 Oct 14/05 B-7 Oct 14/05
List 1002 Oct 14/05 B-8 Oct 14/05
1003 Oct 14/05 B-9 Oct 14/05
1004 Oct 14/05 B-10 Oct 14/05
1005 Oct 14/05 B-11 Oct 14/05
1006 Oct 14/05 B-12 Oct 14/05
1007 Oct 14/05 B-13 Oct 14/05
1008 Oct 14/05 B-14 Oct 14/05
1009 Oct 14/05 B-15 Blank
1010 Oct 14/05 B-16 Oct 14/05
1011 Oct 14/05 B-17 Oct 14/05
1012 Oct 14/05 B-18 Oct 14/05

Page LEP-3
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
SUBJECT PAGE DATE SUBJECT PAGE DATE

This page intentionally left blank.

Page LEP-4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Subject Page No.


Introduction (Also refer to Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS)
Standard Practices Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTRO-1
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Wheel Assembly Dash Number Differences and Effectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Wheel Assembly Component Interchangeability and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main Wheel Assembly Tire Change and Overhaul Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Tabular Definition of Testing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Testing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Unassigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tabular Definition of Disassembly Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Disassembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Tabular Definition of Cleaning Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Cleaning Instructions (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Tabular Definition of Check Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Special Tools and Materals (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Service Defintions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Early Removal Inspection Instructions (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . 503
Inspection Interval Schedules and Storage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Tabular Definition of Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Check Instructions (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Tabular Definition of Repair Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Repair Instructions (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Tabular Definition of Assembly Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Assembly Instructions (Also refer to ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Fits and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Illustrated Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Appendix A - Vendor Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B - Ultrasonic Wheel Hub Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Page TC-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TABLE OF CONTENTS

This page intentionally left blank.

Page TC-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
INTRODUCTION
The procedures contained in this manual for maintaining and overhauling Aircraft Landing
Systems (ALS) Main Wheel Assembly P/Ns 2606671-1/-2/-3, have been verified in compliance
with the intent of the requirements in ATA Specification 100. The procedures outlined in this
manual are intended as a guide, and they need not be strictly followed if equivalent (or better) and
more economical procedures can be adapted.
The procedures used must be consistent with standard shop practices and be carefully evaluated
to ensure that they do not detract from the safety, efficiency, and operation of the end item.
NOTE: The torque limits, service limits, and other specific values described in this manual must
be strictly adhered to.
This manual is organized with separate page number blocks assigned to specific subjects. For
example, Description and Operation starts on page 1, Testing starts on page 101, etc. The page
number block starting with page 201 is not used in this manual. A complete listing of the page
number block and subject assignment is included in the Table of Contents.
An exploded view of the wheel assembly and an accompanying detailed parts list are shown in the
Illustrated Parts List section.
Measurements, dimensions and other values are expressed in U. S. units followed by the
appropriate SI (International System of Units) Metric units in parentheses, except where the
dimensions of standard tools or parts such as drills, taps, bolts, nuts, etc. are given. These
dimensions remain in U. S. units as there are no equivalent metric tools or parts for the
application. A list of units and abbreviations used in this manual is presented in Table 1.
Standard cleaning, check, repair, and assembly procedures applicable to multiple models can be
found in the ALS Standard Practices Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01). Accordingly, these
procedures have been removed from the individual component manuals.
Unit of Measure Abbreviation
Measurement or Dimension Standard Metric Standard Metric
Fluid Volume Fluid ounce Milliliter fl oz ml
Gallon Liter gal l
Linear Inch Millimeter in mm
Foot Meter ft m
Mile Kilometer mi km
Pressure Pounds Per Bar psi bar
Square Inch
Degrees Temperature Fahrenheit Celsius °F °C
Torque Pound-inch Newton-Meter lb-in N⋅m
Pound-foot lb-ft
Weight Ounce Gram oz g
Pound Kilogram lb kg

Units of Measure and Abbreviations


Table 1

Page INTRO-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
INTRODUCTION

This page intentionally left blank.

Page INTRO-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Aircraft Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737-200H
Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS) Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2606671-1
Boeing Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61819-13

Aircraft Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737-200H/-300/-400*/-500


ALS Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2606671-2
Boeing Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61819-18

Aircraft Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737-200H/-300/-500


ALS Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2606671-3
Boeing Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61819-23

Size and Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H40 x 14.5-19


Wheel Assemblies Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four per Aircraft
Wheel Half Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forged Aluminum
* with Maximum Taxi Gross Weight (MTGW) limitation of 144,000 pounds (65,318 kg)
1. General.
CAUTION: THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED SUBSTITUTE PARTS MAY SERIOUSLY
JEOPARDIZE THE RELIABILITY AND SAFETY OF WHEEL ASSEMBLIES.
USE ONLY THE REPLACEMENT PARTS SPECIFIED IN THE ILLUSTRATED
PARTS LIST (IPL) SECTION.
NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the IPL
section.
A. The ALS main wheel assembly for the 737-200H/300/400/500 aircraft is manufactured
to the highest quality standards, to give the user long, dependable service life at a
minimum assembly weight and with minimum maintenance. Avoid abuse during
operation, tire installation, and wheel overhaul because abuse will tend to shorten the
operational life of the wheel.
B. The procedures specified in this Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) are
designed to prepare wheel components for continued satisfactory service and
maximum life. Since part replacement and labor costs vary throughout the world,
operators must individually evaluate the cost of repair versus replacement.
C. ALS recommends operators follow tire and airplane manufacturer requirements for
assembly and in-service tire inflation pressure checks.
D. ALS Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) information can be obtained by contacting:
Honeywell Aircraft Landing Systems
Attn: HS&E, Box 25
3520 Westmoor Street
South Bend, Indiana 46628-1373, U.S.A.
Telephone: (574) 231-2000 - Safety Department, Monday through Friday 8 a.m. to
4 p.m., Eastern Standard time.
Fax: (574) 231-3426.
E. Refer to the Special Tools, Fixtures, and Equipment section for acquisition of tools and
fixtures. ALS service tools are identified with a 255XXXX P/N format.
Page 1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
F. During the manufacturing process, wheel assemblies and wheel halves are forged or
stamped with several important reference numbers. These reference numbers should
be used when documenting service history or corresponding with Honeywell regarding
warranty claims, service limits, or repair guidelines. Format examples and descriptions
for these reference numbers are provided in Table 1. Also see reference number
locations in Figures 1 and 2.
2. Description.
A. Wheel Halves.
(1) The wheel assembly shown in Figure 3 is of the split-type to facilitate tire
installation, with the wheel halves being held together by 16 tie bolts. The
outboard (OB) wheel half incorporates a special large bore pneumatic tire valve
to service the tubeless tire. A pressure relief valve is also provided in the OB
wheel half to protect against overinflation by ground personnel. The relief valve
will rupture and release tire pressure at 375 to 450 psi (26 to 31 bars).
(2) Pneumatic sealing of the wheel halves is accomplished by a preformed packing
located in an annular groove of the inboard (IB) wheel half. A spacer on the
hub pilot between the wheel halves prevents fretting of the adjacent aluminum
surfaces.
B. Wheel Bearings and Seals.
The wheel assembly revolves on tapered roller bearings located in the end of the
wheel hubs. The tapered roller bearings seat in replaceable bearing cups that are
pressed into the wheel hubs. A molded rubber grease seal retains grease in the IB
bearing area and prevents the entrance of dirt, dust, and other foreign matter. This
same protection for the OB bearing area is provided by a bearing cover assembly. An
optional grease seal can also be press-installed into the OB bearing area.
C. Rotor Drive Keys.
Eight rotor drive keys inside the IB wheel half function to key the rotating elements of
the brake to the wheel. The rotor drive keys are hardened steel caps that each cover
an oblong boss forged as part of the wheel half. The caps are secured to the wheel
bosses by machine screws.
D. Heat Shield.
Eight thin stainless steel segments or heat shields line the ID of the IB wheel half. The
segments fit between and are held in place by the rotor drive keys. The heat shield
adds little weight while reducing temperatures experienced by the wheel during
operation. The heat shield also protects the wheel half from impingement of damaging
foreign matter and molten brake residue, which might result from abnormal brake
usage.
E. Thermal Fuse Assembly.
In the event of an abnormal braking condition, protection against an explosive failure
of the tire or wheel due to excessive heat buildup is provided by thermal fuse plugs
that are designed to release at a controlled melting point. For this wheel, four thermal
fuse plugs are installed in the IB wheel half. When these fuse plugs are exposed to a
temperature of 351°F (177°C) or higher, the thermal fuse plugs melt, allowing for tire
deflation.
Page 2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Reference Number Description


Wheel Assembly Part  Identifies the top-level P/N for the assembly. Part numbers are
Number (P/N) followed by a dash number to designate significant changes to the
assembly level configuration. These are addressed in the IPL
under applicable effectivity codes as required.
 The wheel assembly P/N is generally preceded by “ASSY” on the
wheel half.
Wheel Assembly Serial  S/N format is SN B####
Number (S/N)  When purchased from Honeywell as part of a complete wheel
assembly, both the inboard (IB) and outboard (OB) wheel halves
will be stamped with identical “B” serial numbers.
Wheel Half Assembly  S/N format is SN H####
S/N  When individual wheel half assemblies are purchased from
Honeywell, an “H” serial number will be stamped to designate a
replacement service half.
Wheel Half Assembly  Identifies service wheel halves that were not procured as a
P/N complete wheel assembly. These P/N’s are generally ink stamped
above the wheel half machine part number and are not permitted.
Wheel Half Machined  Used to designate the drawing P/N from which the part was
P/N machined.
 The machined P/N is generally preceded by “MACH” on the wheel
half.
Wheel Half Machined  S/N format is x####. For example, x0123.
S/N  The “x” S/N is stamped into each wheel half and is used to track the
machining history of the wheel half.
Wheel Half Forging P/N  Used to designate the forging P/N from which the part was
machined.
 The forging P/N is generally preceded by “FORG” on the wheel
half.
Change (Revision  Each wheel assembly P/N, machined P/N, and forging P/N has a
Level) Letters corresponding change letter. This letter reflects the drawing
revision level when an item was manufactured.
 The change letter is generally preceded by the P/N and stamped
into the pad immediately following “CHG” on the wheel half. In
some cases, the “CHG” designation may not precede the stamped
letter.
Date of Manufacture  Designates the date (month and year) a wheel assembly or service
wheel half completed the manufacturing process at Honeywell ALS.
 The date of manufacture is generally preceded by “MFD” on the
wheel half.

Wheel Assembly Reference Numbers


Table 1
Page 3
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

WHEEL ASSEMBLY
PART NUMBER

WHEEL ASSEMBLY
PART NUMBER
CHANGE LETTER

WHEEL HALF
MACHINE
PART NUMBER

WHEEL HALF
MACHINE
PART NUMBER
CHANGE LETTER

ALS
MANUFACTURING
DATE

WHEEL HALF
WHEEL ASSEMBLY MACHINE
SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER

BOEING WHEEL FORGING PART NUMBER


ASSEMBLY CHANGE LETTER
PART NUMBER
FORGING
PART NUMBER

NOTE: NOTE:
HONEYWELL HAS ADOPTED A POLICY OF FIGURE IS INTENDED ONLY AS A GUIDE
IDENTIFYING WHEEL HALVES BY CAGE CODE FOR THE LOCATION OF REFERENCE
RATHER THAN COMPANY NAME. AN OPERATOR’S NUMBERS. SPECIFIC REFERENCE
FLEET MAY HAVE WHEEL HALVES IDENTIFIED BY NUMBERS SHOWN ARE PROVIDED AS
EITHER “BENDIX” OR CAGE CODE NUMBER AN EXAMPLE. REFERENCE THE
“55284”. WHEEL HALVES MARKED EITHER WAY ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST TO DETERMINE
ARE APPROVED FOR USE AND ARE FULLY SPECIFIC PART NUMBERS.
INTERCHANGEABLE.

LAG-6092

IB Wheel Half Reference Numbers


Figure 1
Page 4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ALS
MANUFACTURING DATE WHEEL HALF MACHINE
PART NUMBER
WHEEL ASSEMBLY CHANGE LETTER
SERIAL NUMBER WHEEL HALF
MACHINE PART NUMBER

WHEEL ASSEMBLY
BOEING WHEEL PART NUMBER
ASSEMBLY CHANGE LETTER
PART NUMBER
WHEEL ASSEMBLY
PART NUMBER
FORGING
PART NUMBER

FORGING
PART NUMBER
CHANGE LETTER

NOTE: NOTE:
HONEYWELL HAS ADOPTED A POLICY OF FIGURE IS INTENDED ONLY AS A GUIDE
IDENTIFYING WHEEL HALVES BY CAGE CODE FOR THE LOCATION OF REFERENCE
RATHER THAN COMPANY NAME. AN OPERATOR’S NUMBERS. SPECIFIC REFERENCE
FLEET MAY HAVE WHEEL HALVES IDENTIFIED BY NUMBERS SHOWN ARE PROVIDED AS
EITHER “BENDIX” OR CAGE CODE NUMBER AN EXAMPLE. REFERENCE THE
“55284”. WHEEL HALVES MARKED EITHER WAY ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST TO DETERMINE
ARE APPROVED FOR USE AND ARE FULLY SPECIFIC PART NUMBERS.
INTERCHANGEABLE.

LAG-6093

OB Wheel Half Reference Numbers


Figure 2
Page 5
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

THERMAL FUSE (LOCATION


FOR P/N 2606671-1)

OUTBOARD WHEEL
HALF

WHEEL SEAL
INBOARD WHEEL PACKING
HALF

AIR VALVE
ASSEMBLY
ROTOR ALIGNMENT
GUIDE

BEARING CUP
AND ROLLERS

WHEEL TIE WHEEL SPACER


BOLTS

SAFETY RELIEF
VALVE

ROTOR DRIVE
KEY THERMAL FUSE
(LOCATION FOR
BEARING CUP P/N 2606671-2/-3)
AND ROLLERS
HEAT SHIELD

GREASE SEAL

WB–368B

Wheel Assembly Cutaway View


Figure 3

Page 6
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
3. Wheel Assembly Dash Number Differences and Effectivity.
The details provided in this section regarding equipment usage on various airplane models is
provided for information only. This information does not allow interchangeability of the wheel
assemblies, unless specifically authorized by Boeing Service Bulletins or by Federal Aviation
Authority approved interchangeability drawings.
A. P/N 2606671-1 Main Wheel Assembly.
(1) Wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 was designed for use on the 737-200H
airplane. Use of this wheel on the 737-300/-400/-500 airplanes is prohibited
due to the higher load and stopping energy requirements of these airplanes.
(2) IB wheel halves for wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 were originally
manufactured with fuse plug installation holes in the tubewell location only. IB
wheel halves permanently marked with machined P/N 2608207 were
manufactured with thermal fuse plug installation holes in both the tubewell and
spoke areas. When used in the P/N 2606671-1 wheel assembly, the four
additional fuse holes located near the spokes must be plugged with machine
thread plug (183).
B. P/N 2606671-2 Main Wheel Assembly.
(1) Wheel assembly P/N 2606671-2 was designed for the higher weight
requirements of the 737-300 airplane. Use of this wheel on the
737-200H/-300/-500 airplanes is permitted without any restrictions. Use of this
wheel assembly on 737-400 airplanes is restricted to airplanes with a MTGW of
144,000 pounds (65,318 kg).
(2) Wheel assembly P/N 2606671-2 differs from wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 in
the following areas:
(a) IB wheel halves are manufactured with fuse plug installation holes in the
spoke area only.
(b) IB wheel halves are manufactured with reduced “C” flange width and
excess material is removed from the tubewell area adjacent to the wheel
packing groove.
(c) OB wheel halves are manufactured with reduced “C” flange width.
C. P/N 2606671-3 Main Wheel Assembly.
(1) Wheel assembly P/N 2606671-3 is a service configuration that allows some
wheel halves manufactured for use in wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 to be
used on 737-200H/-300/-500 airplanes, after modification. Use of this wheel on
737-400 airplanes is prohibited due to the higher load and stopping energy
requirements of this airplane.
(2) Conversion of applicable IB wheel halves for wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1,
originally manufactured with fuse plug holes only in the tubewell area, require
machining to incorporate fuse plug holes near the spokes as outlined in
Paragraph 4.

Page 7
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
(3) IB wheel halves permanently marked with machined P/N 2608207 were
manufactured with thermal fuse plug holes in both the tubewell and spoke
areas and do not require additional machining. When used in the
P/N 2606671-3 wheel assembly, the four additional fuse holes located in the
tubewell between the rotor drive key bosses must be plugged with blank
plug (184).
(4) Conversion of wheel assemblies to the 2606671-3 configuration requires
reidentification of both Boeing and ALS wheel assembly part numbers, as well
as the Technical Standard Order (TSO) authorization. Paragraph 4. defines the
complete requirements for conversion.
4. Wheel Assembly Component Interchangeability and Modifications.
A. At operator option, IB and OB wheel halves from main wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1
and OB wheel halves from main wheel assembly 2606671-2 may be modified for use
in a P/N 2606671-3 main wheel assembly. Rework to modify a component’s effectivity
may be accomplished as follows:
(1) IB wheel half assembly P/N 2606685 (machined wheel half P/N 2606681).
(a) The effectivity for this wheel half is limited to the P/N 2606671-1 main
wheel assembly only. It may not be modified for use in the
P/N 2606671-3 main wheel assembly.
(2) IB wheel half assembly P/N 2606685 (machined wheel half P/N 2607086).
(a) Machine wheel half to incorporate four new fuse holes in the spoke area
as shown in Figure 4. Holes should be located 90 degrees apart and
in-line with the adjacent spoke window centerline as shown in Figure 4.
IB wheel halves are manufactured with fuse plug installation holes in the
spoke area only.
(b) Surface treat the repaired area per the Repair section.
(c) During assembly, blank plug (184) and preformed packing (175) must
be assembled into the tubewell fuse plug holes. Thermal fuse
plugs (182) and preformed packings (181) must be installed in the holes
located in the spoke area.
(d) Ensure heat shields (160A) reflecting the proper effectivity are installed
as outlined in the IPL section.
(e) Reidentify reworked wheel half assembly by steel stamping a dash (-) 1
behind wheel half assembly P/N 2606685.
(f) Reidentify the wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 (Boeing
P/N 10-61819-13) to P/N 2606671-3 (Boeing P/N 10-61819-23).
(g) Reidentify TSO authorization TSO-C26b to TSO-C26b/c.

Page 8
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

0.03 (0.8) R

0.03 (0.8) R

WHEEL SPLIT
LINE MATING 45° 8.560 (217.42)
FACE

CL

0.88 (22.4) DIA COUNTERBORE TO DIM SHOWN


1.000 (25.40) MACHINE PORT HOLE PER MS33649-04
EXCEPT TAP DRILL THRU AND 0.36 - 0.38 (9.1 - 9.7) THD
DEPTH (0.4375-20 UNJF-3B THREAD)
SECTION A-A 4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED AND LOCATED IN
ENLARGED VIEW LINE WITH FORGED WINDOWS AS SHOWN
(RADIAL HOLE PATTERN LOCATION OPTIONAL)
0.040 (1.02) A E G

THERMAL FUSE HOLE LOCATION


C/L WITH WINDOW OPENING A
RADIAL PATTERN OPTIONAL

90° TYP

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5207 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Modification to Add Thermal Fuse Plug Holes Near Spokes
Figure 4

Page 9
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
(3) IB wheel half assembly P/N 2608245 (machined wheel half P/N 2608207).
(a) During assembly, blank plugs (184) and preformed packings (175) must
be assembled into the tubewell fuse plug holes. Thermal fuse
plugs (182) and preformed packings (181) must be installed in the holes
located in the spoke area.
(b) Ensure heat shields (160A) reflecting the proper effectivity are installed
as outlined in the IPL section.
(c) Reidentify reworked wheel half assembly by steel stamping a dash (-) 1
behind wheel half assembly P/N 2608245.
(d) Reidentify the wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 (Boeing
P/N 10-61819-13) to P/N 2606671-3 (Boeing P/N 10-61819-23).
(e) Reidentify TSO authorization TSO-C26b to TSO-C26b/c.
(4) OB wheel half assembly P/N 2606692 (machined wheel half P/Ns 2606688 and
2607087).
(a) Reidentify the wheel assembly P/N 2606671-1 (Boeing
P/N 10-61819-13) to P/N 2606671-3 (Boeing P/N 10-61819-23).
(b) Reidentify TSO authorization TSO-C26b to TSO-C26b/c.
(5) OB wheel half assemblies P/N 2608058 (machined wheel half P/N 2607949)
and P/N 2607949-1 (machined wheel half P/N 2607949).
(a) Reidentify the wheel assembly P/N 2606671-2 (Boeing
P/N 10-61819-18) to P/N 2606671-3 (Boeing P/N 10-61819-23).
5. Main Wheel Assembly Tire Change and Overhaul Requirements.
A. The minimum inspection requirements to be performed at tire change and overhaul are
presented in the Check section.
(1) Tire Change.
ALS recommends, as a minimum, that the wheel halves be cleaned and
visually inspected at each tire change. ALS recommends Non-Destructive Test
(NDT) inspections of the bead seat/tubewell area of each wheel half at each
tire change.
(2) Overhaul.
Overhaul consists of a complete breakdown of the brake assembly. All
components shall be inspected, repaired, or replaced as required, then
reassembled and functionally tested per the appropriate sections.

Page 10
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING
1. Tabular Definition of Testing Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Testing section is presented using a tabular format to organize
Overview the test instructions. A breakdown of the tabular format is as
follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the testing
instructions summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the instructions that should be followed to
test the specified part or assembly.
Breakdown of Testing  Testing paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Section Paragraphs Paragraph Page
2.A. General Testing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.B. Static Balancing of Wheel Half Assemblies . . . . . . 103

Page 101
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING
2. Testing Instructions.
A. General Testing Guidelines.

1.1 Static Balancing General Guidelines


NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the
Illustrated Parts List (IPL) section.
A. All wheel halves are static balanced at time of manufacture.
(1) The balance weight value(s) is stamped on the wheel half flange adjacent to
the balance weight attachment points.
(2) The stamped weight value(s) does not include the weight of the attachment
bolts, nuts, and washers.
(3) The balance weight value(s) is indicated in tenths of an ounce. For
example, a “5” indicates 0.50 ounce (14.2 grams) of added weight. A “12”
indicates 1.20 ounces (34.0 grams) of added weight.
(4) If a wheel half does not require a balance weight, a “0” is stamped on the
wheel flange adjacent to one of the balance weight attachment locations.
B. Outboard (OB) and inboard (IB) replacement service wheel halves are delivered
differently with respect to balance weight installation.
(1) OB wheel halves are delivered with installed balance weights.
(2) While IB wheel halves are stamped with appropriate balance weight value(s)
and location of the rotor alignment guide(s), IB wheel halves are delivered
without the balance weights and alignment guide.
C. Following an overhaul or tire change which require removal of the balance weights,
static rebalancing of the wheel halves is not required, as long as balance weights of
like value are reinstalled on the wheel half during assembly. Repairs made to a
wheel half within the limits of this Component Maintenance Manual, including
removal of material, do not require the repaired wheel half to be rebalanced.
D. If additional hardware (Tire Pressure Indicating System (TPIS), inflation/pressure
gages, etc.) is installed into a wheel half assembly, rebalancing or counterbalancing
of the wheel half assembly will be required as noted per outline number 2.1 or 2.2.
As each wheel half assembly is balanced independently, changes to the OB wheel
half will not impact the IB wheel half and vice versa.

Page 102
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING
B. Static Balancing of Wheel Half Assemblies.

2.1 Rebalancing of Wheel Half Assemblies


A. When rebalancing is required, fully assemble wheel half per the Assembly section,
including any optional equipment and hardware prior to balancing. As an option,
counterbalancing of added components is permitted per outline number 2.2.
(1) For OB wheel half assemblies, an “X” is stamped on the wheel flange to
indicate the location of torque warning plate. Ensure its proper installation.
(2) For IB wheel half, an “X” is stamped on the wheel flange to indicate location
of the rotor alignment guide. Ensure its proper installation.
(3) On both wheel half assemblies, the as-manufactured balance weights may
be left off or installed, at operator option, during the rebalance procedure.
B. Test wheel half assemblies individually for static balance on commercially available
aircraft wheel balancing equipment. Each wheel half must be balanced to within 4
ounce-inches (0.028 N·m). Refer to balance weight information per outline
number 2.3.
(1) For the OB wheel half assembly, position the appropriate balance
weight(s) (90) and attaching parts (95, 100, 105) around the edge of the
wheel half at the attachment point(s) to bring the assembly within balance.
(2) For the IB wheel half assembly, position the appropriate balance
weight(s) (145) and attaching parts (140, 150) around the edge of the wheel
half at the attachment point(s) to bring the assembly within balance. Flat
washer (100) is required under nut (140) if a balance weight is not installed.
C. Once appropriate balance weights are determined, install as follows.
(1) For the OB wheel half assembly, install flat washer (100) under head of
screw (105) and insert screw thorough the attachment hole where weight is
needed. Install needed balance weight (90) over screw. Tighten nut (95)
onto screw as specified in Figure 801.
(2) For the IB wheel half assembly, install screw (150) through heat shield
retainer (155), heat shield (160), rotor alignment guide (170) if applicable,
spacer (165), and then through the wheel half. Place balance weights (145)
and/or flat washer on screw and secure with nut (140). Flat washer must be
installed under nut when a balance weight is not installed. Tighten nut onto
screw as specified in Figure 801.
D. If initial balance weight requirements are changed, obliterate existing weight value
stamped on the wheel half flange. Stamp new weight value on the wheel half
flange adjacent to the attachment point. The stamping should include only the size
of the balance weight. If a wheel half requires no balance weights, a “0” should be
stamped at one attachment location of the wheel flange. Refer to outline
number 1.1, A.

Page 103
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING
2.2 Counterbalancing of Wheel Half Assemblies
A. When optional equipment or hardware, such as TPIS and inflation/pressure gages,
are installed in a wheel half assembly, counterbalancing of the added component
should be accomplished. As an option, the wheel half may be static balanced per
outline number 2.1.
(1) Assembly of both the IB and OB wheel halves should be accomplished per
the Assembly section.
(2) All current wheel balance weights should be installed as described by the
markings on the wheel flange.
B. When optional valve assembly (5D), is installed, four balance weights (90B) may be
installed on the OB wheel half flange 180 degrees opposite the installed gage,
rather than performing the calculation defined in the outline number 2.2, C.
C. To counterbalance a component added at the inflation valve boss on the OB wheel
half, other than optional valve assembly (5D), the following equation may be
applied. Needed balance weights must be installed 180 degrees opposite the
added component:
(1) The following values are assigned to the alphabetical characters below:
WT1 = Balance weight required
WT2 = Weight of valve/gage being installed
WT3 = Balance weight(s) being removed
WT4 = Weight of valve being removed
(2) Use the following equation to determine the required balance weight that
must be added. If attachment hardware is not currently installed 180
degrees opposite the added component, the weight of the attachment
hardware must be subtracted from the weight value determined by the
calculation:
WT1 = 0.853WT 2 - WT3 - WT4
D. Once balance weight requirements are determined, install per outline
numbers 2.1, C. and D.

Page 104
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING
2.3 Balance Weight and Attachment Hardware Data
A. Figure 101 provides balance weight and attachment hardware dimensions and
weight data. Balance weights can be locally manufactured by machining any steel
material to dimensions shown in Figure 101.

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4584 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Dimensions Weight
Inches (mm) Ounce
IPL Figure Item P/N A B C (Grams)

Balance Weight 146287 1.25 (31.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.03 (0.8) 0.12 (3.4)
(90, 145)
Balance Weight 153230 1.40 (35.6) 0.56 (14.2) 0.06 (1.5) 0.21 (6.0)
(90A, 145A)
Balance Weight 153237 2.00 (50.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.06 (1.5) 0.41 (11.6)
(90B, 145B)
Balance Weight 2606616 1.36 (34.5) 0.44 (11.2) 0.06 (1.5) 0.15 (4.3)
(90C, 145C)
Balance Weight 2606715 2.00 (50.8) 0.56 (14.2) 0.06 (1.5) 0.29 (8.2)
(90D, 145D)
Rotor Alignment 2601116 --- --- --- 0.34 (9.6)
Guide (170)
Rotor Alignment 2611186 --- --- --- 0.25 (7.1)
Guide (170A)
Nuts (95, 140) 146204 --- --- --- 0.07 (2.0)
Flat Washer (100) AN960-10 --- --- --- 0.03 (0.9)
Flat Washer (100A) AN960-10L --- --- --- 0.015 (0.43)
Screws (105, 150) MS16998-31 --- --- --- 0.15 (4.3)

Balance Weight and Attachment Hardware Data


Figure 101

Page 105
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
TESTING

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 106
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DISASSEMBLY
1. Tabular Definition of Disassembly Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Disassembly section is presented using a tabular format to
Overview organize the disassembly instructions. A breakdown of the tabular
format is as follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the disassembly
instructions summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the instructions that should be followed to
disassemble the specified part or subassembly.
Breakdown of  Disassembly paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Disassembly Paragraph Page
Section Paragraphs
2.A. General Disassembly Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.B. Collection of Wheel Service and Part
Use History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.C. Wheel Disassembly - Requirements for Tire
Change and Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
2.D. Wheel Disassembly - Disassembly
Requirements for Overhaul Only, Unless
Condition of Wheel Warrants Earlier Inspection . . 303

Page 301
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DISASSEMBLY
2. Disassembly Instructions.
A. General Disassembly Guidelines.

1.1 General Instructions Applicable to the Disassembly Section


NOTE: Coordinate disassembly of all components with the requirements of the Cleaning
and Check sections. Components failing to meet the documented service limits
shall not be reinstalled in the wheel.
NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the
Illustrated Parts List (IPL) section.
CAUTION: HANDLE THE WHEEL WITH CARE DURING DISASSEMBLY AND ALL
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL PROCEDURES TO AVOID
SCRATCHES, NICKS, AND GOUGES TO THE WHEEL.
A. Perform all disassembly operations in a clean area.
B. The instructions listed in this section assume that all parts shown in the exploded
view in the IPL section are attached to the wheel at the time it arrives for repair. If
some parts are missing, disregard the instructions that pertain to the disassembly of
these parts.

B. Collection of Wheel Service and Part Use History.

2.1 Collection of Wheel Service and Part Use History


A. Aircraft Landing Systems recommends that wheel assembly service and part use
records be maintained by each airline at each level of service responsibility - i.e.
wheel removal, tire change or overhaul, and wheel assembly returned to service.
This will require the cooperation of personnel at each level of aircraft maintenance.
B. Prior to performing any disassembly operations, thoroughly evaluate wheel
assembly for defective parts or released fuse plugs. If abnormalities are found,
mark locations and note occurrence in the wheel assembly service history log.

Page 302
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DISASSEMBLY
C. Wheel Disassembly - Requirements for Tire Change and Overhaul.

3.1 Wheel Disassembly - Remove Bearings and Separate Wheel Halves


WARNING: DEFLATE TIRE PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY.
A. If a tire is installed on the wheel, check to be sure that the tire is deflated before
beginning disassembly. Remove valve cap (10) and valve core (15) from the valve
stem (25).
B. Remove grease seal (31), if used, and tapered roller bearing (30) from the hub
cavity of the outboard (OB) wheel half assembly (85). Remove retaining ring (35),
grease seal (40), and tapered roller bearing (45) from the hub cavity of the inboard
(IB) wheel half assembly (190).
CAUTION: IF A WHEEL TIE BOLT IS BROKEN OR MISSING, OR A TIE BOLT
NUT IS MISSING, REFER TO THE CHECK SECTION,
PARAGRAPH 4. FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
C. Remove self-locking nuts (50B), recessed washers (55), and machine bolts (60).
CAUTION: DO NOT PRY BETWEEN THE WHEEL FLANGE AND THE TIRE
BEAD WITH A SHARP OBJECT, AS THE WHEEL AND THE TIRE
MAY BE DAMAGED.
NOTE: When breaking tire bead on OB wheel flange, support IB wheel flange to
prevent damage to rotor drive key bosses.
D. Separate the wheel halves and remove tire. Refer to Airframe Manufacturer’s
Maintenance Instructions for tire removal.
E. Remove preformed packing (65) from the IB wheel half assembly (190).
CAUTION: DO NOT PRY BETWEEN SPACER (185) AND WHEEL FLANGE
WITH A SHARP OBJECT, AS THE WHEEL MAY BE DAMAGED.
F. Remove spacer from the IB wheel half assembly (190). If spacer is cemented in
place, it does not need to be removed for standard tire change inspections.

D. Wheel Disassembly - Disassembly Requirements for Overhaul Only, Unless Condition


of Wheel Warrants Earlier Inspection.

4.1 Wheel Disassembly - OB Wheel Half Assembly (85)


A. Remove the balance weight assemblies (90 through 105) and instruction plate
(110).
B. Remove the valve stem (25) and safety relief valve (75A) from OB wheel half
assembly (85). Remove preformed packing (20) from valve stem and preformed
packing (70) from safety relief valve. Discard preformed packings.
C. Do not remove the screw thread inserts (115) or tapered bearing cup (120) unless
inspection determines that their replacement is necessary, or the wheel half is to be
anodized. Refer to the Repair section for removal instructions.

Page 303
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
DISASSEMBLY
4.2 Wheel Disassembly - IB Wheel Half Assembly (190)
NOTE: Rotor drive key screws that are self-locking or were installed with Loctite are not
staked.
A. Remove rotor drive keys (130) by removing deformed material, caused during
staking, from the head of the machine screws (135) and removing the machine
screws. Lift the rotor drive keys off the wheel bosses.
B. Remove nuts (140), balance weights (145) or flat washers (100), screws (150), heat
shield retainers (155), heat shields (160), spacers (165), and rotor alignment
guide (170).
CAUTION: EXERCISE CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE FINISH INSIDE
THE FUSE PLUG PORTS.
NOTE: Tag wheels with released thermal fuses. Refer to the Check section,
Paragraph 4. for additional instructions.
NOTE: Some wheels are configured with thermal fuse holes in both the tubewell
and spoke areas. Removal of hardware from both locations is required.
C. Remove thermal fuse plugs.
 For wheels with thermal fuse holes in the tubewell, remove thermal fuse
plugs (180) or blank plugs (184) as applicable by pushing them out of the
tubewell using a wooden or fiber dowel. Discard preformed packings (175).
 For wheels with thermal fuse holes in the spoke area, remove thermal fuse
plugs (182) or machine thread plug (183) as applicable using a 5/8-inch
socket. Discard preformed packings (181).
CAUTION: DO NOT PRY BETWEEN SPACER (185) AND WHEEL FLANGE
WITH A SHARP OBJECT, AS THE WHEEL MAY BE DAMAGED.
D. Remove spacer from the IB wheel half assembly (190). If spacer is cemented in
place, acetone or lacquer thinner may be used to soften the cement.
E. Do not remove tapered bearing cup (195) unless inspection determines that its
replacement is necessary, or the wheel half is to be anodized. Refer to the Repair
section for removal instructions.

Page 304
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CLEANING
1. Tabular Definition of Cleaning Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Cleaning section is presented using a tabular format to
Overview organize the cleaning instructions. A breakdown of the tabular
format is as follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the cleaning
instructions summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the guidelines that should be followed to
clean the specified part or assembly.
Breakdown of Cleaning  Cleaning paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Section Paragraphs Paragraph Page
2.A. General Cleaning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
2.B. Cleaning Guidelines Specific to this Component
Maintenance Manual (CMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

2. Cleaning Instructions.
A. General Cleaning Guidelines.

1.1 General Cleaning Guidelines


WARNING: WHEN USING CLEANING AGENTS, FOLLOW THE MANUFACTURER’S
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. TAKE PROPER PRECAUTIONS TO
PREVENT CLEANING AGENTS FROM CONTACTING SKIN OR
CLOTHING, AND TO AVOID INHALING VAPORS.
CAUTION: MANY CLEANING AGENTS ARE DETRIMENTAL TO OTHER PARTS OR
MATERIALS OF THE ASSEMBLY. ENSURE CLEANING AGENTS ARE
USED FOR THEIR INTENDED PURPOSE AND THAT OTHER PARTS
ARE EITHER ISOLATED FROM THE CLEANING AGENT OR PROPERLY
MASKED TO PREVENT UNINTENDED DAMAGE.
NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the
Illustrated Parts List section.
A. See Figure 401 for references to cleaning guidelines. This is a complete list of
generic procedures that may be applied to both wheel and brake components. The
second column of Figure 401 identifies the location where the specified procedure
may be found. Most cleaning procedures are published in the Aircraft Landing
Systems (ALS) Standard Practices Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01). Refer to
Paragraph 2.B. for cleaning guidelines specific to this CMM.

B. Cleaning Guidelines Specific to this CMM.

2.1 Cleaning Guidelines Specific to this CMM


A. No specific cleaning guidelines are defined for this CMM. See Figure 401 and the
ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
Page 401
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CLEANING

Cleaning Procedure Where Found When


Remove Carbon Deposits Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
(ATA 32-49-01). at heat stack or tire change.
Remove Corrosion from Refer to the ALS SPM Whenever corrosion is found
Aluminum Parts (ATA 32-49-01). during inspection.
Remove Corrosion from Refer to the ALS SPM Whenever corrosion is found
Steel Parts (ATA 32-49-01). during inspection.
Inboard Wheel Half Heat Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
Shield Cleaning (ATA 32-49-01). at tire change.
Procedures
Remove Paint from Refer to the ALS SPM Only remove paint when required
Aluminum Parts (ATA 32-49-01). to facilitate Non-Destructive Test
(NDT) inspection or repair
procedures.
Remove Paint from Steel Refer to the ALS SPM Only remove paint when required
Parts (ATA 32-49-01). to facilitate NDT inspection or
repair procedures.
Remove Anodize from Refer to the ALS SPM Only remove the corrosion
Aluminum Parts (ATA 32-49-01). protection layer when required by
repair procedures.
Steel Brake Cleaning Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
Procedures (ATA 32-49-01). at heat stack change.
Carbon Brake Cleaning Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
Procedures (ATA 32-49-01). at heat stack change.
General Wheel Cleaning Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
Procedures (ATA 32-49-01). at heat stack or tire change.
Clean Rubber Parts Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and when necessary
(ATA 32-49-01). at heat stack or tire change.
Wheel Bearing Cleaning Refer to the ALS SPM At overhaul and at each tire
Procedures (ATA 32-49-01). change.
Cleaning Procedure Overview
Figure 401

Page 402
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
1. Tabular Definition of Check Requirements.

Topic Description
Breakdown of  Check paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Check Section Paragraph Page
Paragraphs
2. Special Tools and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
3. Service Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
4. Early Removal Inspection Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 503
5. Inspection Interval Schedules and Storage
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
6. Tabular Definition of Inspection Requirements . . . 506
7. Check Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
2. Special Tools and Materials.

Topic Description
Standard Tools and  Refer to the Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS) Standard Practices
Fixtures Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01) for the most current list of tools, fixtures,
and equipment common to multiple wheel assemblies.
Special Gage  Fabrication of all needed fixtures, gages, or tooling necessary to
Blocks and Tooling accomplish the inspection procedures of this Component Maintenance
Manual (CMM) may be accomplished by each operator. Where
specific gages or tooling are suggested, operators may elect to use the
illustrated method or develop their own equivalent method.

Page 501
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
3. Service Definitions.

Topic Description
In-Service Definition  For new wheel halves, time in service begins when a tire is first
mounted to the wheel half assembly, provided that the date is
documented.
 For used wheel halves or assemblies lacking documented service
history, time in service reverts to the date of manufacture stamped on
the wheel half assembly (the earlier manufacturing date of the two
mated halves in the assembly).
Accumulated Time  Time in service accumulates continuously from the initial in-service
In Service date of the wheel half or assembly.
 No allowances are provided for wheel half assemblies that are
mounted on stored or grounded aircraft.
Wheel Half  If verifiable service history is not available, all wheels purchased used
Assemblies should be overhauled to ensure compliance with the service limits of
Procured Used this CMM.
Collection of Wheel  Operators should collect wheel service history data, including
Service History accumulated tire changes or landings, repairs made, and any wheel
failure modes.
 When a wheel half assembly fails or is removed from service due to a
crack indication, notify ALS Field Service Engineering.
 If deemed necessary, failed wheels may be returned to ALS for
additional investigation. Service and repair history should be submitted
with the returned wheel.
Accumulated  Fatigue damage accumulates during the service life of each wheel half
Fatigue Damage assembly.
and Wheel Service  The probability of fatigue crack initiation increases as the wheel half
Life Considerations assembly accumulates landings and time in service.
 Corrosion, if not removed or if improperly removed, can significantly
reduce the service life of a wheel half assembly, whether on or off the
aircraft.
 ALS strongly encourages maintenance of the anodize/primer/paint
protection system during the life of each wheel half assembly to assist
in preventing corrosion.

Page 502
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
4. Early Removal Inspection Instructions.

Topic Description
Deflated Tire  Wheels with deflated tires that have not been rolled under load must be
inspected to identify location of air leakage. If thermal fuse plugs are
released or partially melted, the wheel assembly must be inspected as
defined per the next topic (“Fuse Release”). Otherwise, perform
normal tire change inspection requirements, replacing any defective
parts.
 Wheels with deflated tires that have been rolled under load must be
inspected for damage to the wheel flange. Any damage observed on
the wheel flange due to ground contact is not repairable and requires
the wheel to be scrapped immediately. Wheels with no damage to the
flange must be overhauled. In addition, if thermal fuse plugs are
released or partially melted, perform inspections as defined per the
next topic (“Fuse Release”).
 The remaining wheels on the aircraft should be inspected for removal
from the aircraft in accordance with the requirements of the airframe
manufacturer. Any wheel removed must be overhauled.
Fuse Release  When wheels are found with released or partially melted thermal fuse
plugs, inspect for hardness per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
- Minimum hardness for both the inboard (IB) and outboard (OB)
wheel half assemblies is 75 HRB or 119 HB/10/500 when using the
indentation method. Maximum percent conductivity as determined
by means of eddy current is 41.5% International Annealed Copper
Standard.
- If wheel half assemblies meet the minimum hardness requirements,
the wheel half assembly must be overhauled per the requirements
of the Check section. Before a wheel half assembly is returned to
service, optional shot peening of the tubewell outside diameter (OD)
may be performed per the Repair section. When manufactured,
shot peening was performed to increase wheel half assembly
fatigue life by imparting beneficial residual compressive stresses on
the peened surfaces. The beneficial stresses may have been lost at
fuse release temperatures.
- Wheel half assemblies and other components not passing
inspection requirements must be scrapped.
Missing or Broken  For single bolt failures, each tie bolt adjacent to the broken bolt should
Tie Bolts be removed and scrapped.
 For multiple bolt failures, all tie bolts in the wheel should be scrapped.
- Notify ALS of all occurrences of multiple tie bolt failure.
Other Early  For other in-service conditions that result in wheel damage, ALS Field
Removals Service Engineering can assist in determining the required level of
inspection needed for continued serviceability.
Page 503
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
5. Inspection Interval Schedules and Storage Guidelines.

Topic Description
Tire Change  Definition - Minor disassembly of wheel and inspection performed at all
Inspection Interval tire removals.
(Minor Servicing)
Overhaul Inspection  Definition - Major disassembly of wheel and inspection of all
Interval (Major components.
Servicing)  Wheel assemblies must be overhauled every 24 months or 1800
landings whichever occurs first. At operator option, overhaul timing
may be managed based on accumulated tire changes that are
equivalent to the 1800 landing criteria (e.g. if the average fleet landings
per tire is 230, 1800/230 or 7 tire changes are permitted between
overhauls).
- A wheel assembly that reaches the end of its 24 month overhaul
cycle or accumulates 1800 landings while installed on the airplane
does not require immediate removal. In this case, to accommodate
tire wear, the assembly may remain in service for up to an additional
four months.
- At operator option, a wheel assembly that reaches the end of its 24
month overhaul cycle without being installed on airplane may be
disassembled and inspected per the tire change inspection criteria.
Successful completion of the minor inspection restarts the overhaul
inspection interval. An evidence of corrosion requires an overhaul
to be performed.
 As a wheel half accumulates more landings, it may become necessary
to shorten the timeframe between overhaul inspections or increase the
frequency of Non-Destructive Test (NDT) inspections. These decisions
may be made by operators based on their documented service history.

Page 504
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Topic Description
General Wheel CAUTION: MOISTURE, GRIT, OR OTHER CONTAMINATES THAT
Storage Guidelines ARE ALLOWED ON THE SURFACES OF WHEEL HALVES
MAY INCREASE THE LIKELIHOOD OR ACCELERATE
THE DEVELOPMENT OF CORROSION. IF THE
STORAGE HISTORY OF A WHEEL IS NOT KNOWN,
DISASSEMBLY OF THE WHEEL SHOULD BE
PERFORMED TO INSPECT HIDDEN WHEEL SURFACES.
 Wheel assemblies must be stored in an environment free of moisture,
grit, and other contaminates.
 Prior to all airplane installations, a visual inspection of the wheel, with
tire mounted, should be performed. If corrosion or damage is found
during a visual inspection, the wheel assembly must be overhauled.
 Periodic inspection of bearing grease for stored wheels may be
accomplished based on operator service experience and
grease/bearing manufacturer recommendations.
Storage Inflation  Wheel assemblies may be stored and transported at full inflation
Pressure pressure, if permitted by tire, airframe manufacturer, and regulatory
requirements.

Page 505
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
6. Tabular Definition of Inspection Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Check section requirements defined per Paragraph 7. are
Overview presented using a tabular format to assist in organizing the needed
inspections. A breakdown of the tabular format is as follows:
 Column 1 identifies the outline number for the check instructions
summarized in the table.
 Column 2 provides the required instructions that are to be performed
for the wheel half assembly component being inspected.
 Columns 3 and 4 define the intervals for when each inspection
instruction is to be performed. The two intervals identified are “Tire
Change” and “Overhaul”.
- An “X” for any inspection item indicates that the item must be
accomplished at the interval marked.
- An “O” for any inspection item indicates that the item is desirable
but optional based on operator experience.
Breakdown of  Check paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Check Section Paragraph Page
Paragraphs
7.A. General Wheel Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
7.B. IB and OB Wheel Half Assembly Visual
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
7.C. IB and OB Wheel Half Assembly NDT
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
7.D. Attachment Hardware Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
7.E. Thermal Fuse Plugs, Valve Assembly,
Safety Relief Valve, and Plugs Inspection . . . . . . . 519
7.F. Rotor Drive Key Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
7.G. Preformed Packing Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
7.H. Installed Tapered Bearing Cup Inspection . . . . . . . 524
7.I. Tapered Roller Bearings Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
7.J. Grease Seal Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
7.K. Heat Shield Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
7.L. Spacer Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
7.M. Balance Weight Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Page 506
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 507
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
7. Check Instructions.
A. General Wheel Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
1.0 General Wheel Inspection Change Overhaul
NOTE: When wheel half assemblies manufactured in different years or having accumulated a
different number of landings or tire changes are mated together in an assembly, the
overhaul frequency selected should be based on the wheel half assembly that is older,
or has accumulated more use.
NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the Illustrated
Parts List section.
1.1 General - Based on service records, determine number of X X
landings or number of tire changes since last inspection. Using
criteria defined in Paragraph 5., determine if a tire change or
overhaul inspection must be performed.
CAUTION: ANY WHEEL HALF WHICH SHOWS EVIDENCE THAT IT HAS ROLLED ON A
RUNWAY WITHOUT A TIRE MAY NOT BE REPAIRED AND MUST BE
SCRAPPED. DAMAGE ACCRUES IN THE VERTICAL PORTION OF THE RIM
FLANGE (”C” SECTION) VERY RAPIDLY WHEN ROLLING WITHOUT A TIRE.
EVEN THOUGH NO DAMAGE OTHER THAN THE RUNWAY ABRASION IS
EVIDENT, THE FLANGE IS SEVERELY WEAKENED AND MAY BE CRACKED.
THE PROBABLE FAILURE MODE OF A WHEEL SO DAMAGED IS A
DISINTEGRATED FLANGE.
1.2 General - Prior to disassembly, inspect wheel half assemblies (85, X X
190) for missing parts and evidence of component malfunction or
other obvious failures. If fuse plugs are found melted or flange
damage is observed on wheel half assemblies as a result of
ground contact, refer to Paragraph 4. for additional inspection
instructions.
1.3
Disassembly - Disassemble the wheel per the Disassembly X X
section based on the requirements of the inspection interval.
Additional disassembly may be necessary if component damage
or failure is observed.
1.4 Cleaning - All components removed from the wheel half X X
assemblies (85, 190) shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried per
the Cleaning section.
NOTE: Any part not meeting the specified inspection instructions must be removed and
repaired within the limits of this CMM. All parts that cannot be repaired or are outside
the acceptable limits must be scrapped.

Page 508
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
B. IB and OB Wheel Half Assembly Visual Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals

2.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half Tire


Assembly (85) Visual Inspection Change Overhaul
CAUTION: CORROSION, NO MATTER HOW MINOR, ESPECIALLY IN AND ON BOTH
SIDES OF THE BEAD SEAT RADIUS AND ON THE TUBEWELL ID OPPOSITE
THE TIRE CONTACT AREA, WILL CAUSE PREMATURE FATIGUE CRACKING
AND POSSIBLE CATASTROPHIC FLANGE SEPARATION. CORROSION
PRODUCTS AND CORROSION PITTING MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE
RETURNING WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLIES (85, 190) TO SERVICE.
2.1 Visual - Inspect all visible surfaces of the wheel half X X
assemblies (85, 190) for damage to the paint or corrosion
protection layers. All wheel half assembies that have bare
exposed metal must be repaired within the limits of this CMM.
Preventive maintenance of the paint/primer/anodize surface
protection layers will reduce the potential for corrosion and the
resulting stress concentrations that can initiate fatigue cracking.
NOTE: The tubewell area of each wheel half assembly (85, 190) is particularly susceptible to
mechanical damage during tire installation and removal. Mechanical damage resulting
from tire movement during rolling is considered normal and does not need to be
repaired, as long as minimum tubewell thicknesses, as defined in the Repair section,
are not violated. If mechanical damage is observed on the wheel half assembly
flange that resulted from ground contact, refer to Paragraph 4. for additional
requirements.
2.2 Visual - Carefully inspect all visible surfaces of the wheel half X X
assembies (85, 190) for mechanical damage and corrosion using
magnification, if required. Evidence of damage or corrosion
requires immediate repair.
2.3 Visual - Inspect threaded areas of the wheel half assemblies (85, X
190) for corrosion, mechanical damage, or thread damage, as
applicable:
 Thermal fuse plug ports
 Rotor drive key mounting locations
 Overpressure, inflation, and Tire Pressure Indicating System
(TPIS) valve ports
 Hubcap mounting locations
2.4 Measurement - For IB wheel half assemblies (190) that have fuse X
hole ports in the tubewell area, measure fuse hole for wear. Fuse
holes may not exceed a diameter of 0.332 inch (8.43 mm). Holes
shall show no evidence of mechanical damage.

Page 509
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Inspection
Intervals

2.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half Tire


Assembly (85) Visual Inspection Change Overhaul
2.5 Visual and Measurement - Inspect wheel tie bolt holes and bolt X
hole spotfaces for wear. Holes may not exceed limits specified in
Figure 501.
2.6 Visual - Inspect grease seal seat and retainer ring groove for X X
excessive wear or rough edges.
2.7 Visual and Measurement - Inspect the hub pilot area mating faces X X
for wear, grooving, fretting, or other damage. Wear may not
exceed the limits specified in Figure 501. In the event that a shim
repair has been accomplished on the wheel half assemblies (85,
190), ensure that the shim (186A, 186B) thickness is marked
correctly. If shim is held in place by adhesive, ensure that
applicable limits are not exceeded.
2.8 Visual - Inspect wheel half assemblies (85, 190) mating surfaces X X
for operational wear and fretting. Repair wheels with bare metal
exposed and blend all sharp edges or gouges within the limits of
the Repair section.
2.9 Visual - Inspect IB wheel half assembly (190) integral rotor drive X
key bosses for operational wear. Any damage identified must be
repaired within the limits of the Repair section. Wear exceeding
the allowable repairs requires the IB wheel half assembly to be
scrapped.
2.10 Visual - Inspect IB wheel half assembly (190) tubewell ID for wear X
where heat shield (160) abrasion occurs. Repair wheels with bare
metal exposed and blend all sharp edges or gouges within the
limits of the Repair section.
2.11 Visual - Carefully inspect all visible surfaces of the wheel half X X
assemblies (85, 190), based on level of disassembly, for potential
fatigue crack indications using magnification, if required.

Page 510
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

0.605 (15.37)
DIA MAX

WHEEL
SPLIT
LINE

0.254 (6.45) 0.005 (0.13)


MAX MAX

INBOARD WHEEL HALF OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF

GO, NO-GO GAGE


MARK
STRAIGHT BAR INBOARD
2606671
ON THIS FACE
0.25 - 0.50
1.00 (25.4) (6.4 - 12.7)
+ 0.0021 - 0.000
(+ 0.051 - 0.00) MARK
15 (381) OUTBOARD
± 0.03 (0.8) 2606671
ON THIS FACE
1.005 (25.53)
1.254 (31.85) ± 0.0005 (0.013)
0.50 - 1.00
± 0.0005 (0.013)
(12.7 - 25.4) OUTBOARD
INBOARD MEASUREMENT
MEASUREMENT

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-6107 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Wear Limits of Hub Mating Surfaces and Tie Bolt Holes


Figure 501
Page 511
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 512
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
C. IB and OB Wheel Half Assembly NDT Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals

3.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half Tire


Assembly (85) NDT Inspection Change Overhaul
CAUTION: CORROSION AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE, NO MATTER HOW MINOR,
ESPECIALLY IN AND ON BOTH SIDES OF THE BEAD SEAT RADIUS AND ON
THE TUBEWELL ID OPPOSITE THE TIRE CONTACT AREA, MAY CAUSE
PREMATURE FATIGUE CRACKING AND POSSIBLE CATASTROPHIC FLANGE
SEPARATION IF NOT DETECTED IN TIME. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THESE AREAS BE INSPECTED FOR CRACKS BY EDDY CURRENT OR
ULTRASONIC NDT INSPECTION TECHNIQUES. EXTREME CARE SHOULD
BE MADE TO INSPECT THESE AREAS THOROUGHLY.
NOTE: Automatic eddy current or ultrasonic inspection methods should be used to detect
potential cracks in the areas specified below. The ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) may
be used as a general guide when performing NDT inspections. Any wheel half
assembly (85, 190) found with crack indications cannot be returned to service
unless specifically authorized by ALS per the Repair section. Most fatigue cracks
are not repairable and require immediate retirement of the wheel half assembly.
NOTE: Fluorescent penetrant inspection may be used in place of eddy current or
ultrasonic inspection techniques for tire change inspections. However, this
method will require complete disassembly of the wheel and paint removal at each
tire change.
NOTE: Wheel service history should be documented by each operator. Any area that
exhibits a service history of fatigue cracks should be inspected using NDT
methods.
NOTE: NDT Level III specialists should be consulted to develop proper inspection
methods and procedures based on required reference standard sensitivity levels,
available equipment, processes, and techniques.

Page 513
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Inspection
Intervals

3.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half Tire


Assembly (85) NDT Inspection Change Overhaul
3.1 NDT - Inspect IB and OB wheel half assemblies (190, 85) bead X X
seat and tubewell OD, from the wheel flange to the wheel split line
or at the edge of the preformed packing groove, for potential
indications. This inspection is recommended at all services. See
Figure 502.
 When using automatic NDT equipment for wheels with thermal
fuse plugs (180, 182) in the tubewell, the fuse holes may be
masked to allow the transducer to pass the rotor drive key
boss without becoming damaged. Inspect fuse holes with a
hand-held probe.
 When using automatic NDT equipment, inspection of the
tubewell may be terminated at the edge of the air passageway
holes in the tubewell to avoid damaging the transducer. At
overhaul, inspect the area around all air passageway holes
from the tubewell OD with a hand-held probe for potential
indications.
NOTE: Rotor drive key (130) and heat shield (160) must be removed to conduct NDT inspection
of the rotor drive key boss area.
3.2 NDT - Inspect IB wheel half assembly (190) rotor drive key bosses O X
at the base of the rotor drive key boss along the tubewell, at the
attachment screw hole locations, and at the blend radius of rotor
drive key boss near the tie bolt flange for potential indications.
This inspection is recommended at overhaul.
3.3 NDT - If excessive heat shield (160) rubbing or corrosion is O X
observed in the IB wheel half assembly (190) tubewell ID between
rotor drive key bosses, thoroughly inspect damaged areas for
potential indications.

Page 514
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

TUBEWELL OD AND BEAD SEAT


RECOMMENDED CHECK EACH TIRE CHANGE

TUBEWELL ID
BETWEEN TIE BOLT
ROTOR DRIVE HOLES
KEY BOSSES

SPOKES

WHEEL HUB
MATING
FACE

WHEEL
SPLIT LINE
IB HUB

ROTOR DRIVE
KEY BOSS AND
ATTACHMENT
OB HUB
SCREW
LOCATIONS

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE
INBOARD WHEEL HALF

OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF


LAG-5180C

Primary NDT Inspection Locations


Figure 502

Page 515
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Tire
Change Overhaul

3.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half


Assembly (85) NDT Inspection
NOTE: NDT inspection of the bearing bore corner radius using ultrasound may be
successfully conducted on wheels that have had bearing bore thermal spray or
bearing bore bushing repair performed.
3.4 NDT - At operator option based upon a known service history of O O
wheel hub cracks or failures within their fleet, inspect the IB wheel
half assembly bearing bore corner radius for potential indications
using ultrasound. This inspection is to be performed from the hub
OD, with the tapered bearing cup (120, 195) installed, and will
detect cracks that may propagate away from the corner radius to
the hub OD. Refer to Appendix B for procedural guidelines.
 In the absence of a known service history, inspection at each
tire change is recommended for IB wheel half assemblies that
are 10 years of age or older, or if they have achieved 10,000
landings.
NOTE: The tapered bearing cups (120, 195) should not be removed from the IB and OB wheel
half assemblies (85, 190) for standard visual and NDT inspections.
3.5 NDT - When the bearing cup (120, 195) or bearing cup and X X
bushing assembly (125B, 200B) is removed from wheel half
assemblies (85, 190), inspect the bearing bore ID and corner
radius for potential indications using eddy current, ultrasound, or
fluorescent penetrant inspection. Refer to the Repair section for
removal and additional inspection requirements.
3.6 NDT - Inspect IB and OB tie bolt holes from the mating face side X
at the exit radius for potential indications.
3.7 NDT - Inspect thermal fuse plug, pressure relief, TPIS, and X
inflation valve holes for potential indications.
3.8 NDT - Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection. O/X
 Optional - Fluorescent penetrant inspection methods are
optional if coverage of the wheel half assemblies (85, 190) is
accomplished by eddy current or ultrasonic inspection
methods in the areas identified in outline numbers 3.1
through 3.7.
 Required - If coverage of the wheel half assemblies is not
accomplished by eddy current or ultrasonic inspection
methods in the areas identified in outline numbers 3.1
through 3.7, a fluorescent penetrant inspection is required.
NOTE: For areas identified below with “NDT or Visual” inspection requirements identified, each
operator may determine the level of inspection required based on their documented
service history. If fatigue cracks, excessive corrosion, or mechanical damage is
observed for an individual wheel half, NDT inspection methods should be used to
inspect for potential cracks.

Page 516
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Tire
Change Overhaul

3.0 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) and OB Wheel Half


Assembly (85) NDT Inspection
3.9 NDT or Visual - Inspect IB wheel half assembly (190) preformed X
packing groove and preformed packing groove extension for
potential indications.
3.10 NDT or Visual - Inspect IB and OB wheel half assemblies (190, X
85) spokes for potential indications.
3.11 NDT or Visual - Inspect hubcap attachment holes in the OB wheel X
half assembly (85) for potential indications.
3.12 NDT or Visual - Inspect IB and OB wheel half assemblies (190, X
85) hub OD for potential indications.
3.13 NDT or Visual - Inspect spacer pilot flange radius for potential X
indications, as applicable.
3.14 NDT or Visual - Inspect IB and OB wheel half assemblies (190, X
85) grease seal seat area for potential indications, as applicable.

Page 517
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
D. Attachment Hardware Inspection.

Inspection
Intervals
Tire
4.0 Attachment Hardware Change Overhaul
NOTE: ALS recommends operators to adopt a life-limit replacement plan for the machine
bolts (60) in an effort to reduce inspection time and potentially reduce in-service failure
rates. ALS initially recommends that the life limit be set at 8,000 landings. Adjustments
to the life limit may be made, depending on the individual operator’s acceptable
in-service failure rate. If a life-limit replacement plan is adopted, NDT inspections of
machine bolts are optional. Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) for more detailed
information regarding implementation of a life-limit replacement plan.
NOTE: Cadmium plating should be restored on the machine bolt after 10 nut installations to
maintain joint lubricity, critical to achieving proper joint preload during installation.
Instructions for replating the machine bolts are found in the Repair section. As an
alternative, if the self-locking nuts (50B) are replaced after 10 uses, the machine bolts
do not need to be replated. Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) for additional
information regarding ALS recommendation for maintaining cadmium plating in the joint
through a self-locking nut replacement plan.
4.1 Visual - Inspect machine bolt (60) date codes if a life-limit X X
replacement plan is used. Retire machine bolts exceeding the
established life limit.
4.2 Visual - Examine shop records to determine number of X X
accumulated self-locking nut (50B) installations on the machine
bolts (60). If 10 reuses or tire changes have been previously
accomplished, replace the machine bolt or restore the cadmium
plating per the Repair section. If the self-locking nuts are replaced
or replated after 10 reuses, this step may be omitted.
4.3 Visual - Inspect machine bolt (60) for corrosion and mechanical X X
damage per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Replace machine bolt
as required. Missing cadmium plating on the shank or head of the
machine bolt is not cause for rejection unless corrosion pitting is
observed.
4.4 NDT - Perform magnetic particle inspection on machine bolts (60) X X
per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Retire machine bolts with crack
indications. This inspection may be omitted if a life-limit
replacement plan is used.
NOTE: ALS recommends operators replace the self-locking nuts (50B) after 10 uses to ensure
cadmium plating is present in the thread interface. Refer to the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01) for additional information on this subject. Instructions for replating the
self-locking nuts are found in the Repair section.
4.5 Visual - If a 10-reuse replacement policy is used for the X X
self-locking nut (50B), examine shop records to determine number
of accumulated self-locking nut installations on the machine
bolts (60). If 10 reuses or tire changes have been previously
accomplished, replace the self-locking nut.
Page 518
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
4.0 Attachment Hardware Change Overhaul
4.6 Visual - Inspect self-locking nut (50B) for corrosion and X X
mechanical damage per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Replace
self-locking nut as required.
4.7 Measurement - Inspect locking feature of self locking nut (50B) for X X
minimum reusable torque as shown in Figure 801 and the ALS
SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Discard nuts not meeting this requirement.
This step may be omitted if a 10-reuse replacement plan is used.
4.8 Measurement - At operator option based on service experience O
with nut loosening, check locking feature of self-locking nuts (95,
140) for minimum reusable torque per Figure 801. Discard nuts
not meeting the minimum requirement.
4.9 Visual - Inspect all miscellaneous attachment hardware not X X
mentioned above for corrosion and damage.

E. Thermal Fuse Plugs, Valve Assembly, Safety Relief Valve, and Plugs Inspection.
Inspection
5.0 Thermal Fuse Plugs (180, 182 as Applicable), Valve Intervals
Assembly (5), Safety Relief Valve (75A), and Plugs (183, 184 Tire
as Applicable) Change Overhaul
5.1 Visual - Inspect threads for damage. X
5.2 Visual - Inspect preformed packing groove or land on each X
component. Ensure no sharp edges or burrs are present that
might cut a preformed packing upon installation.
5.3 Visual - Inspect thermal fuse plugs (180, 182) for a melted or X X
partially melted condition. If melted, refer to Paragraph 4. for
additional instructions.
5.4 Measurement - Check safety relief valve (75A) for air leakage by X
installing in a suitable fixture and pressurizing to 300 psi (21 bars).
No leakage is allowed. Replace defective safety relief valves.

Page 519
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
F. Rotor Drive Key Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
6.0 Rotor Drive Keys (130) Change Overhaul
6.1 Visual - Inspect rotor drive keys (130) side rails for corrosion, X X
mechanical damage, and unusual wear. Wear on side rail of rotor
drive keys should exhibit a gradual transition into and out of the
wear spot. Repair rotor drive keys within limits specified in the
Repair section as necessary.
 Tire Change - Rotor drive keys do not need to be removed for
inspection unless repair or replacement is necessary.
 Overhaul - In addition, inspect for damage to plating or paint.
6.2 Measurement - Inspect rotor drive keys (130) width using a Go, X
No-Go gage. If width is less than 0.910 inch (23.11 mm), inspect
each side rail of the rotor drive key for localized wear. If any wear
spot is greater than 0.020 inch (0.51 mm); or the minimum rotor
drive key width is less than 0.891 inch (22.63 mm), the rotor drive
key must be scrapped. See Figure 503. Additional discussion of
the inspection requirements and details for fabricating a Go,
No-Go gage can be found in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
6.3 Visual - Inspect rotor drive keys (130) for sharp edges or burrs in X
areas that contact the wheel boss.
6.4 Measurement - Inspect rotor drive keys (130) for flatness. X
Maximum out-of-flatness is 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). Rotor drive
keys that do not meet the minimum requirement should be
replaced or repaired within the limits specified in the Repair
section. See Figure 504.
6.5 NDT - At operator option based on service history, perform O
magnetic particle inspection (longitudinal magnetization) of rotor
drive keys (130) per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
6.6 NDT - Based on appearance, hardness testing of rotor drive O
keys (130) may be performed at operator option. If appearance of
rotor drive keys suggests exposure to unusually high
temperatures, or if excessive wear is present on surfaces
contacted by the brake rotor assemblies, hardness testing of the
rotor drive keys must be performed. Measure hardness on the
inside surface of the rotor drive keys at mid length. Do not
measure on drive surface of rotor drive key. Minimum hardness is
45 HRC.

Page 520
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

LOWER EDGE OF SIDE RAIL USE AN UNWORN SIDE RAIL


CHAMFER OR RADIUS SURFACE AS A ZERO REFERENCE
POINT FOR DETERMINING LOCAL
WEAR DEPTH

LOCAL
0.110 (2.79)
SIDE VIEW WEAR SPOTS

ROTOR CONTACT REGION

TOP VIEW

0.891 (22.63) MIN WIDTH


LOCAL WEAR DEPTH MEASUREMENT IS
SIDE RAIL TOP EDGE OF
NOT REQUIRED IF MINIMUM KEY WIDTH
MAXIMUM LOCAL CHAMFER
IS MORE THAN 0.910 (23.11)
WEAR DEPTH OR RADIUS
0.020 (0.51)

0.110 (2.79)
MAXIMUM LOCAL TOP OF KEY
WIDTH MEASUREMENTS
SHOULD BE TAKEN 0.110 WEAR DEPTH
(2.79) BELOW TOP OF 0.020 (0.51)
ROTOR DRIVE KEY
END VIEW CLOSE-UP OF LOCAL WEAR

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4776A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Rotor Drive Key Cap Wear Depth Determination


Figure 503

Page 521
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK

MACHINE SUPPORT BLOCK AND GAGE


BLOCK TO IDENTICAL DIMENSION
PERMANENTLY MARK ALIGNMENT
MARK IN TOP OF BLOCK TO ASSIST
IN POSITIONING KEY ON BLOCK 0.026 - 0.027 (0.66 - 0.69) SECOND STEP

1.25 (31.8) 0.150 (3.8)

1.00 (25.4)

4.00 (101.6) 1.00 (25.4)

0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7)


SUPPORT BLOCK GO / NO-GO GAGE BLOCK

MATERIAL:
AMS 4330, AMS 4340 STEEL OR EQUIVALENT
CRES 15-5, CRES 17-4 STAINLESS STEEL OR EQUIVALENT

POSITION SUPPORT BLOCK


1.25 (31.8) FROM CENTERLINE IF GAGE BLOCK CANNOT BE INSERTED INTO CHANNEL
OF INNER SCREW HOLE OR IF SECOND STEP OF GAGE BLOCK CAN BE INSERTED
AS SHOWN INTO CHANNEL, KEY MUST BE REPAIRED OR SCRAPPED

GAGE
SUPPORT BLOCK BLOCK

ALIGNMENT MARK
FLAT PLATE OR EQUIVALENT SURFACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4834C MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Integral Rotor Drive Key Flatness Inspection


Figure 504

Page 522
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
G. Preformed Packing Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
7.0 Preformed Packings (20, 65, 70, 175, 181) Change Overhaul
NOTE: Preformed packings that are out-of-shape may return to normal size if they are allowed
to rest in the free state for a few days.
NOTE: Following inspection, lubricate serviceable wheel seal preformed packing (65) with
silicone compound per Specification SAE-AS-8660 (replaces MIL-S-8660) or
SAE-G-4343 (replaces MIL-G-4343). Store preformed packings in a container to
prevent contamination until reuse. Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) for
compounds.
7.1 Visual - Inspect wheel seal preformed packing (65) for the X X
following defects that will affect its sealing ability: cross-sectional
out-of-round condition, cracks, gouges, and over-stretched
circumference. Acceptable preformed packings require a slight
stretch to install them on the wheel. Replace preformed packings
that have defects.
7.2 General - All miscellaneous preformed packings, other than the X
wheel seal preformed packing (65), should be discarded upon
removal of parts.

Page 523
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
H. Installed Tapered Bearing Cup Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
8.0 Installed Tapered Bearing Cup (120, 195) Change Overhaul
8.1 Visual - Check the tapered bearing cups (120, 195) for damage X X
per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-40-01) and the manufacturer’s
instructions. Replace any defective tapered bearing cups.
8.2 Measurement - Check tapered bearing cups (120, 195) for proper X X
installation per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Tag any wheel half
assemblies (85, 190) found defective for repair.
 Movement of the tapered bearing cups when tested for
tightness is considered unacceptable.
 The maximum clearance allowed between the bottom of the
tapered bearing cups, and the shoulder of the wheel hub is
0.002 inch (0.05 mm), not to exceed 3/4 of the periphery.
 Extruded metal from tapered bearing cup rotation is
unacceptable.
8.3 General - Immediately following inspection, lightly oil or grease X X
surfaces to prevent corrosion.

I. Tapered Roller Bearings Inspection.


Inspection
Intervals
Tire
9.0 Tapered Roller Bearings (30, 45) Change Overhaul
9.1 Visual - Check tapered roller bearings (30, 45) for damage per the X X
ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) and the bearing manufacturer’s
instructions. Replace any defective tapered roller bearings.
9.2 General - Immediately following inspection, pack tapered roller X X
bearings (30, 45) with grease or lightly oil to prevent corrosion.
Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) for instructions for
lubricating tapered roller bearings.

Page 524
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
J. Grease Seal Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
10.0 Grease Seals (31, 40) Change Overhaul
10.1 Visual - Check grease seals (31, 40) for nicks or gouges that X X
interfere with proper grease retention. Inspect for evidence of
overheating and resilience. Replace defective grease seals.

K. Heat Shield Inspection.


Inspection
Intervals
Tire
11.0 Heat Shields (160) Change Overhaul
11.1 Visual - Inspect heat shields (160) in the wheel for severe X X
buckling, dents, or distortions that may interfere with the brake or
affect heat shield retention. Heat shields exhibiting such
distortions or a ruptured surface should be removed for repair
within the limits specified in the Repair section. With heat shields
installed in the IB wheel half assembly (190), brake interference
with the heat shields may be inspected by inserting a rotor into the
IB wheel half assembly. Heat shields that contact the IB wheel
half assembly should be identified for repair.
11.2 Visual - Check heat shields (160) for cracks and failed weld O X
seams. Small cracks less than 1.0 inch (25 mm) in length and
failed weld seams less than 1.0 inch (25 mm) in length do not
need to be repaired, as long as they do not interfere with the heat
shield installation or retention. All other cracks and failed weld
seams must be repaired within the limits specified in the Repair
section.
11.3 Visual - Check retention of heat shield (160) installation bracket. O X
Any failed weld seam requires the heat shield to be repaired within
the limits specified in the Repair section.
11.4 Visual - Inspect heat shield (160) for bumpers or RTV used as a O X
substitute for bumpers to ensure heat shield does not contact IB
wheel half assembly (190). Tag heat shield for repair as required.

Page 525
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
CHECK
L. Spacer Inspection.
Inspection
Intervals
Tire
12.0 Spacer (185) Change Overhaul
12.1 Visual - Inspect each spacer (185) for damage or cracks. Replace X X
as required.
12.2 Measurement - Inspect spacer (185) thickness. Replace X X
spacers that do not meet the minimum thickness of 0.247 inch
(6.27 mm).

M. Balance Weight Inspection.


Inspection
Intervals
Tire
13.0 Balance Weights (90, 145) Change Overhaul
13.1 Visual - Inspect each wheel half assembly (85, 190) for balance X X
weights (90, 145). If missing, replace per stamped weight as
required. In the event main wheel half assemblies are balanced
using self-adhesive balance weights, check security of balance
method. Refer to the Testing section.

Page 526
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
1. Tabular Definition of Repair Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Repair section requirements defined per Paragraph 2. are
Overview presented using a tabular format to assist in organizing the repair
instructions. A breakdown of the tabular format is as follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the repair instructions
summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the part and feature for which repair instructions
were written.
Breakdown of  Repair paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Repair Section Paragraph Page
Paragraphs
2.A. General Repair Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
2.B. Inboard (IB) Wheel Half Assembly Repair
Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
2.C. Outboard (OB) Wheel Half Assembly Repair
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
2.D. Rotor Drive Key Repair Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
2.E. Machine (Tie) Bolt Repair Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 690
2.F. Tie Bolt Self-Locking Nut Repair Instructions . . . . . 691
2.G. Heat Shield Repair Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
2.H. Grease Seal Anti-Rotation Nib Repair . . . . . . . . . . 696

Page 601
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2. Repair Instructions.
A. General Repair Guidelines.

1.1 General Instructions Applicable to the Repair Section


NOTE: The repairs authorized and described in this section are intended to extend the
life of the parts to a degree. The repairs will not necessarily restore the parts to
a like-new condition.
NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the
Illustrated Parts List section.
A. Replace all parts that do not meet the check or test requirements and cannot be
restored to a serviceable condition by allowable repairs. All parts that cannot be
repaired or are outside the acceptable limits must be scrapped.
B. Some of the repairs listed herein require removal of the tapered bearing
cups (120, 195). This need should be determined at the start of the repair. When
required, remove the tapered bearing cup per the applicable instructions in this
Component Maintenance Manual (CMM).
C. Repair or removal of material affecting stamped or forged markings will require
restoring such information in accordance with standard shop practices.
D. For all repairs accomplished, remove only the amount of material required to blend
out the area of damage or corrosion, while adhering to the specified limits for each
repair. Also, relieve all sharp corners or indentations that could result in stress
concentrations. When not specified, the surface finish of all repaired areas must be
equal to, or better than, the adjacent untouched surface.
E. Areas on either wheel half assembly (85, 190) that have had aluminum material
removed by repair should be etched to remove smeared material if subsequent
penetrant inspections will be performed on those specific areas. Procedures for
performing the etch process are defined in the Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS)
Standard Practices Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01).
F. Areas on either wheel half assembly (85, 190) where the anodic coating has been
removed due to wear or repair should be surface treated to restore the corrosion
protection system.
G. ALS considers paint to be a vital part of the corrosion protection system that should
be maintained throughout the life of the component. Areas on either wheel half
assembly (85, 190) where the paint coating has been removed due to wear or
repair should be repainted.
H. ALS recommends that shot peening be performed on the tubewell outside diameter
(OD) of each wheel half assembly (85, 190) following fuse plug release. In
addition, shot peening should be locally performed on any wheel following repair of
the tubewell OD. Shot peening of other areas is optional; however, it does provide
a service-life enhancement relative to fatigue crack resistance. Shot peening
instructions are defined in outline numbers 2.24 and 3.21.

Page 602
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
B. IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) Repair Instructions.

2.1 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Repair Guidelines


A. Procedures for performing local blend repair, consisting of removing damaged or
corroded material, are presented in outline number 2.2.
B. Repairs for specific features of the wheel to address damage, corrosion, and
normal wear have also been developed. Figure 601 may be used as a quick
reference guide to locate a specific repair procedure.
C. For areas where repairs have not been developed, contact ALS Field Service
Engineering to determine if repairs are feasible. Digital photographs, if possible,
and measurement of the surface area and depth of damage must be submitted with
the request.

TIE BOLT HOLE SPOTFACE (2.15)


(2.13 - REAM)
(2.14 - BUSHING) HUB PILOT (2.3)

GREASE SEAL
SEAT AND SNAP
RING GROOVE
(2.10 - BUSHING)
(2.11 - EPOXY)

BEARING CUP
REPLACEMENT
(2.8)
HUB MATING
FACE
(2.4 - SHIM)
(2.5 - THERMAL
SPRAY)

BEARING BORE
(2.6 - THERMAL)
(2.7 - BUSHING)

HUB OUTSIDE
DIAMETER (2.9)
ROTOR DRIVE
KEY SCREW
HOLE (2.21)

SEAL GROOVE
FUSE PLUG ROTOR DRIVE (2.17 - BLEND)
HOLE (2.23) KEY BOSS (2.18 - WELD)
(2.20 - BLEND
AND EPOXY) FUSE PLUG
HOLE (2.22)
STANDARD GUIDELINES: NOTE:
LOCAL BLEND (2.2) FEATURES ARE IDENTIFIED
SHOT PEEN (2.24) FOLLOWED BY REPAIR
SURFACE TREATMENT (2.25) INSTRUCTION OUTLINE
PAINT (2.26) NUMBER IN PARENTHESES
LAG-5205A

IB Wheel Half Assembly Features and Repair References


Figure 601
Page 603
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.2 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Local Blending Repair Instructions
A. For all repairs accomplished, remove only that amount of material required to blend
out the area of damage or corrosion, and relieve all sharp corners or indentations
that could result in stress concentrations. The repair should result in a smooth
contoured area with a minimum blend radius of 0.5 inch (13 mm). When not
specified, the surface finish of repaired areas must be equal to, or better than, the
adjacent untouched surface.
B. Figure 602 identifies areas of the IB wheel half assembly (190) that have specific
repairs permitted. Adhere to documented repair allowances.
C. Repaired areas that will subsequently be Non-Destructive Test (NDT) inspected
using dye penetrant methods should be etched to remove smeared material.
Procedures for performing the etch process are defined in the ALS SPM (ATA
32-49-01).
D. ALS recommends all repaired areas on the tubewell OD be shot peened following
repair. Shot peening of other areas is considered optional; however, it does provide
a service life enhancement relative to fatigue crack resistance. Shot peening
instructions are defined in outline number 2.24.
E. Surface treat all repaired areas of the IB wheel half assembly (190) as defined in
outline number 2.25.

Page 604
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “X”

0.20 (5.1) MIN P/N 2606685 AND


DIM “X” 5.86 (148.8)
P/N 2608245
0.35 (8.9)
MIN
AREA “C” 1 P/N 2608059 AND
0.90 (22.9) P/N 2607948-1 5.67 (144.0)
0.030 (0.76)
REF
AREA “B”
0.030 (0.76)
AREA “D” 2
AREA “A” 0.030 (0.76)
0.030 (0.76)

AREA “D” 2
0.030 (0.76)
AREA “E” 3
0.010 (0.25) 0.49 (12.4) MIN

AREA “F” 4
AREA “H” 0.030 (0.76)
0.030 (0.76) 6.50
0.63 (16.0) MIN
(165.1) R
AREA “I” 6
0.060 (1.52) 5.40
AREA “L” 8 (137.2) R

AREA “J”
0.030 (0.76)

AREA “K” 7
0.030 (0.76)
AREA “N” 10
0.060 (1.52)
AREA “G” 5
0.030 (0.76)

AREA “M” 9

SECTION A–A
A

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5166A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Assembly Local Blending Repair Limits


Figure 602 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Page 605
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

Note Area Description


1 C Repairs limited to 3.00 square inches (1,936 square mm) per repair. Maximum of
nine repairs per wheel. Repaired areas to be 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) apart
minimum. It is not necessary to remove ridges or markings caused by the normal
working of the tire unless inspection shows this area to be damaged. ALS
recommends repairs in this area be shot peened following repair.
2 D Minimum tubewell wall thickness to be maintained as shown. It is not necessary
to remove ridges or markings caused by the normal working of the tire unless
inspection shows this area to be damaged. ALS recommends repairs to the
tubewell OD be shot peened following repair.
3 E Local repair of spotface bearing surface is not permitted.
4 F Local repair limits may be exceeded up to the limits of spoke thickness shown.
5 G Local repair limits may be exceeded up to the limits of spoke thickness shown.
6 I Repairs limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a minimum of 3.00 inches
(76.2 mm) of undamaged material between repairs.
7 K Repairs limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a minimum of 3.00 inches
(76.2 mm) of undamaged material between repairs.
8 L Up to 90 degrees of the hub pilot may be removed. When blending material from
the wheel pilot, no material removal is permitted below the existing hub mating
surface (Area K). Blend edges and corners resulting from repair to a minimum
0.50 inch (12.7 mm) blend radius.
9 M Local repair limits for the rotor drive key boss are defined as part of the rotor drive
key boss epoxy repair, outline number 2.20.
10 N Sides of rotor drive key boss must not be undercut.
IB Wheel Half Assembly Local Blending Repair Limits
Figure 602 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Page 606
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 607
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.3 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Hub Pilot Replacement
A. Machine wheel to remove hub pilot as shown in Figure 603. If repair is being done
to remove a crack, the area must be checked following machining to ensure the
crack has been completely removed before proceeding.
B. Locally manufacture repair pilot ring as shown in Figure 604.
C. Surface treat the repair pilot ring and repaired area per outline number 2.25.
D. Apply LOCTITE 638 Retaining Compound to the hub pilot area and the mating
surface of the pilot ring.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
E. Press the repair pilot ring into the wheel and verify that it is fully seated. Remove
excess retaining compound and retain in place for 24 hours.
F. After 24 hours, verify that the pilot ring cannot be rotated. If it can be rotated,
remove all retaining compound and repeat installation procedure.
G. Following installation, ensure repair pilot ring meets the dimensional requirements
as shown in Figure 603.

Page 608
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

0.340 (8.64)
–A– 0.335 (8.51)
0.001 (0.03) B

5.844 (148.43)
5.842 (148.39) DIA

( 5.804 (147.42)
5.800 (147.32) DIA) 5.647 (143.43)
5.646 (143.41) DIA

–B–
0.005 (0.13) A

0.245 (6.22) MAX MEASURE


FOLLOWING INSTALLATION
OF REPLACEMENT
PILOT RING

0.025 (0.64)
0.035 (0.89) 0.015 (0.38) R
0.025 (0.64) R
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5164 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Assembly Hub Pilot Repair, Wheel Machining and Repair Ring Installation
Figure 603

Page 609
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.75 (19.1)
0.580 (14.73)
0.570 (14.48)
–C– 0.04 (1.0) X 45° CHAMFER
5.38 (136.7) DIA

5.649 (143.48) 5.840 (148.34)


5.648 (143.46) DIA 5.834 (148.18) DIA

0.03 (0.8) X 45°


0.001 (0.03) C

MATERIAL:
2024 ALUMINUM

0.035 (0.89)
0.025 (0.64) 0.025 (0.64) R
0.015 (0.38) R
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5165 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Hub Pilot Repair Ring


Figure 604

Page 610
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 611
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.4 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Hub Mating Face Shim Repair
A. Damage or wear on the hub mating face surface that cannot be repaired by local
blending may be repaired by installing a repair shim (186A, 186B).
B. Machine the hub mating surface to remove damage or wear. Repair dimensional
requirements are defined in Figure 605. Dimension “A” requirements are listed in
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) increments. Do not exceed the maximum “A” dimension
noted. Requirements for the pilot ring OD and corner radius are also defined.
Surface finish of the machined area should be 125 microinches (3.2 µm) maximum.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
D. Permanently mark the thickness of shim repair on the inner face of the wheel as
shown in Figure 605.
E. Install one or a combination of two shims (186A, 186B) as required as shown in
Figure 606 to restore the desired hub mating surface assembly fit. No more than
two shims may be used together to make the repair. Repair shims may be
manufactured locally or obtained from ALS. Figure 606 defines the shim
requirements.
F. Cement the repair shim(s) (186A, 186B) to the wheel hub mating surface using a
thin film of 3M Cement No. EC-847 or EC-776. The surface of both the machined
wheel hub and the shim must be clean, dry, and free from foreign matter. Coat only
one side of the shim with cement and immediately install in the wheel half assembly
using even pressure to ensure full contact. Maintain even pressure until the
cement sets. If two shims are used, cement them together prior to assembly in the
wheel have assembly. All surfaces other than those being bonded shall be free of
cement.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.

Page 612
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

“A”
0.309
(7.85)
MAX

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

0.06 (1.5) R

PERMANENTLY
MARK THICKNESS
OF SHIM ON THIS
SURFACE
5.840 (148.34)
INBOARD WHEEL 5.834 (148.18)
REF

NOMINAL SHIM
REPAIR INCREMENT “A” DIMENSION
THICKNESS REQUIRED
1 0.266 - 0.269 (6.76 - 6.83) 0.020 (0.51)
2 0.276 - 0.279 (7.01 - 7.09) 0.030 (0.76)
3 0.286 - 0.289 (7.26 - 7.34) 0.040 (1.02)
4 0.296 - 0.299 (7.52 - 7.59) 0.050 (1.27)
5 0.306 - 0.309 (7.77 - 7.85) 0.060 (1.52)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5167 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Hub Machining Requirements for Shim Repair


Figure 605

5.99 - 6.01
(152.1 - 152.7)

6.89 - 6.91
(175.0 - 175.5)
MATERIAL:
TYPE 302 STAINLESS STEEL

ALS PART THICKNESS

WHEEL SHIM 0.018 - 0.022 (0.46 - 0.56)


(FIRST OVERSIZE) (186A)
WHEEL SHIM 0.028 - 0.032 (0.71 - 0.81)
(SECOND OVERSIZE) (186B)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5168 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Requirements for Hub Mating Face Repair Shims


Figure 606
Page 613
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.5 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Hub Mating Face Thermal Spray Repair
A. Damage or wear on the hub mating face surface that cannot be repaired by local
blending may be repaired by thermal spray repair.
B. Machine the hub mating surface to remove damage or wear. Repair dimensional
requirements are defined in Figure 607. Dimension “A” limits are set to ensure
resulting thermal spray thickness after machining is a minimum of 0.010 inch
(0.25 mm) and a maximum of 0.040 inch (1.02 mm). Requirement for the pilot ring
OD is also defined.
C. Apply thermal spray to the repair area per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Buildup of
the thermal spray material must be sufficient to allow full cleanup of the repaired
area when final machining is complete.
D. Machine the thermal sprayed area to the dimensions shown in Figure 607. Full
cleanup of the repaired surface is required.
E. After thermal spray machining is complete, check coating for evidence of cracks,
pin holes, loosely adhering particles, blistering, or flaking. No defects are permitted.
F. Thermal spray repairs may be performed additional times, provided the original
thermal spray material is removed to bare aluminum and the dimensional limits of
Figure 607 are observed.
G. Thermal spray repairs may be performed in conjunction with shim (186A, 186B)
repairs as desired to restore the necessary hub mating surface assembly fit. The
incremental “A” dimension values defined in Figure 607 can result from a thermal
spray repair. However, the maximum “A” value defined applies prior to thermal
spray application and the resulting thermal spray coating may not exceed
0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE
MACHINE 0.260 (6.60) MIN,
DIM “A” MACHINE TO 0.286 (7.26) MAX TO CLEAN
0.246 - 0.250 (6.25 - 6.35) UP BEFORE THERMAL
AFTER THERMAL SPRAY SPRAY.

THERMAL SPRAY SURFACE

5.840 (148.34)
5.834 (148.18)
BREAK CORNER TO OBTAIN
0.02 (0.5) MIN THICKNESS
THERMAL SPRAY AT CORNER
AFTER FINISH MACHINING
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5169 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Assembly Hub Mating Surface Thermal Spray Repair


Figure 607

Page 614
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 615
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.6 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Bearing Bore Thermal Spray Repair
NOTE: Local repair under the cup in the bearing bore is not permitted.
NOTE: Incorporation of this repair may violate minimum hub wall thickness requirements
if a hub turn repair has previously been performed. If a hub turn repair has been
incorporated, the dimensional limits of this repair may need to be adjusted to
meet the minimum hub wall thickness requirements defined in Figure 613. The
minimum hub wall thickness must be maintained in all cases.
A. Damage to the bearing bore may be repaired by applying thermal spray coating.
B. Dimensional requirements for performing the repair are shown in Figure 608.
Finished machine dimensions, as defined, restore the wheel dimensionally to the
original configuration. In addition, the coating is limited to a thickness range. Two
repairs, identified as Primary and Alternate, are listed. The Primary repair always
produces coating thickness within the allowable range. The Alternate repair permits
additional cleanup of the thrust shoulder, however, the machining requirement for
“A” after thermal spray must be determined based on the value of “A” from wheel
cleanup machining. Maintaining the coating thickness within the allowable range
dictates the final machining requirements.
C. Machine the bearing bore diameter and thrust shoulder as required to remove
damage. Remove only enough material to fully remove the damage, while
maintaining the dimensional limits specified in Figure 608.
D. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove smeared material per the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).
E. NDT inspect the machined surfaces for cracks per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
No cracks are permitted.
F. ALS suggests that the repaired surfaces be shot peened. Shot peening not only
provides fatigue crack resistance, but enhances the bond strength of the thermal
spray. Shot peening instructions are defined in outline number 2.24.
G. Thoroughly clean and degrease the repaired surfaces.
H. Apply thermal spray to the repair area per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Buildup of
the thermal spray material must be sufficient to allow full cleanup of the repaired
area when final machining is complete.
I. Machine the thermal sprayed area to the dimensions shown in Figure 608. Full
cleanup of the repaired surface is required.
J. After thermal spray machining is complete, check coating for evidence of cracks,
pin holes, loosely adhering particles, blistering, or flaking. No defects are permitted.
K. Thermal spray repairs may be performed additional times, provided the original
thermal spray material is removed to bare aluminum and the dimensional limits of
Figure 608 are observed.
L. Surface treat any bare aluminum surfaces resulting from the repair process per
outline number 2.25.
M. Install the tapered bearing cup (195) into the wheel per the tapered bearing cup
installation procedures defined in outline number 2.8.

Page 616
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

100 (2.5 µm)

DIM “A”

DIA “B”

0.135 (3.43)
0.115 (2.92) R
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5178 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Primary Repair
Wheel Machining Requirement Thermal Spray Machining Requirement
Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
“A” 3.39 (86.1) minimum 3.410 (86.61) minimum
3.40 (86.4) maximum 3.430 (87.12) maximum
“B” 5.824 (147.93) minimum 5.800 (147.32) minimum
5.880 (149.35) maximum 5.804 (147.42) maximum
Alternate Repair
(Requires Calculation of Final Machining Dimension)
Wheel Machining Requirement Thermal Spray Machining Requirement
Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
“A” Up to 3.37 (85.6) As determined by operator to meet both criteria
as follows:
(1) Final machining range 3.41 - 3.43
(86.6 - 87.1)
(2) Final coating thickness range 0.01 - 0.04
(0.3 - 1.0)
“B” Same as Primary Same as Primary
IB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore Thermal Spray Repair
Figure 608
Page 617
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.7 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Bearing Bore Bushing Repair
NOTE: Local repair under the cup in the bearing bore is not permitted.
NOTE: Incorporation of this repair may violate minimum hub wall thickness
requirements if a hub turn repair has previously been performed. If a hub
turn repair has been incorporated, the dimensional limits of this repair may
need to be adjusted to meet the minimum hub wall thickness requirements
defined in Figure 613. The minimum hub wall thickness must be
maintained in all cases.
A. Machine the bearing bore as shown in Figure 609, View 1. Remove only enough
material to cleanup the damage, while maintaining the dimensional limits defined for
areas “A” and “B.”
B. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove smeared material per the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).
C. NDT inspect the repaired areas for cracks per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). No
cracks are permitted.
D. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
E. Locally manufacture a bearing bore bushing as shown in Figure 610, or obtain ALS
repair bearing bore bushing (200B). A light coat of SAE #10 oil may be applied as
a corrosion inhibitor if the bearing bore bushing will not be immediately installed in
the IB wheel half assembly (190).
F. Press tapered bearing cup into bearing bore bushing. Ensure that the tapered
bearing cup is fully seated in the bearing bore bushing using a feeler gage. No gap
is permitted at the thrust shoulder.
NOTE: If bearing bore bushing has been coated with oil, thoroughly clean to
remove all oil residue prior to installing the tapered bearing cup (195).
G. Machine the bearing bore bushing and tapered bearing cup (195) assembly as
shown in Figure 609, View 2. Dimensional requirements for machining of the OD,
“D,” and the back of the thrust shoulder, “C,” are defined in the table in Figure 609.
Adherence to these dimensions is critical to produce the proper press fit of this
assembly into the IB wheel half assembly (190) and to position the bearing bore
bushing on the axle. Note that accurate measurements of “A” and “B” following
wheel machining are necessary to determine “C” and “D.”
H. Thoroughly clean all residue from the outside surface of the tapered bearing
cup (195) and bearing bore bushing assembly. Install the assembly into the IB
wheel half assembly (190) per the tapered bearing cup installation procedures
defined in outline number 2.8.

Page 618
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “C”
WHEEL SPLIT 100 (2.5 µm)
LINE MATING
FACE

100 (2.5 µm)

DIM “A”

DIA “B” DIA “D”

0.155 (3.94)
0.135 (3.43) R
0.135 (3.43)
0.115 (2.92) R VIEW 2
BEARING BORE BUSHING AND
VIEW 1 TAPERED BEARING CUP
WHEEL MACHINING ASSEMBLY MACHINING

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5175 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Requirements
Dimension Wheel Half Applicability Inch (mm)
“A” All 3.32 (84.3) minimum
3.38 (85.9) maximum
“B”* Forging P/N 2606677 Rev. “M” and 5.848 (148.54) minimum
Prior 5.884 (149.45) maximum
Forging P/N 2606677 Rev. “N” and 5.848 (148.54) minimum
Subsequent 5.924 (150.47) maximum
“C” All 4.438 (112.73) minus “A” minimum
4.444 (112.88) minus “A” maximum
“D” All “B” plus 0.0085 (0.216) minimum
“B” plus 0.0135 (0.343) maximum
* If verification of the forging revision level can not be accomplished, the lesser repair limits apply.
Bushing Repair of IB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore
Figure 609

Page 619
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

MATERIAL:
4130 STEEL PER AMS 6350,
AMS 6370, AMS 6371
4140 STEEL PER AMS 6381,
AMS 6382, AMS 6395
8630 STEEL PER AMS 6280,
AMS 6281, AMS 6345
8740 STEEL PER AMS 6322,
AMS 6323, AMS 6358
4340 STEEL PER AMS 6415,
AMS 6414, AMS 6359

HEAT TREATMENT:
160,000 - 180,000 PSI
(11,032 - 12,411 BAR)
ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH
PER AMS-H-6875 OR
AMS 2759

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5174B MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore Repair Bushing


Figure 610

Page 620
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.8 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tapered Bearing Cup (195) Replacement
CAUTION: SUPPORT THE IB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY (190) IN THE AREA
DIRECTLY BENEATH THE WHEEL HUB WHILE APPLYING FORCE SO
THAT FORCE WILL NOT BE TRANSMITTED THROUGH SPOKES OF
WHEEL. SEE FIGURES 611 AND 612.
A. Remove defective tapered bearing cup (195).
NOTE: It is not mandatory that the wheel be heated prior to removal of
tapered bearing cup. However, heating the wheel allows much
easier removal of the tapered bearing cup.
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE
ADAPTER INTO THE CAVITY OF THE IB WHEEL HALF
ASSEMBLY (190) TO PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE IB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AT THE
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF 220°F (104°C) ANY LONGER THAN
NECESSARY FOR REMOVAL OF TAPERED BEARING CUP.
(1) Heat the wheel hub inside diameter (ID) area to 220°F (104°C) maximum
using either an oven or P/N 2558450 wheel hub heating fixture. When using
the wheel hub heating fixture, preheat for a period of two to three minutes
prior to insertion into wheel hub. Time required to heat wheel hub with fixture
will be 60 - 70 seconds.
(2) Press the tapered bearing cup out of the wheel using the P/N 2558111
bearing cup driver and the P/N 2558442 wheel hub support oriented as
shown in Figure 611.
B. Inspect bearing bore. Repair of the bearing bore is required prior to installation of
the tapered bearing cup (195) if the diameter exceeds 5.804 inches (147.42 mm),
or damage is present due to tapered bearing cup spinning or corrosion.

Page 621
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.8 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tapered Bearing Cup (195) Replacement
C. Install tapered bearing cup (195).
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE
ADAPTER INTO THE CAVITY OF THE IB WHEEL HALF
ASSEMBLY (190) TO PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE IB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AT THE
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF 220°F (104°C) ANY LONGER THAN
NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF TAPERED BEARING CUP.
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup must be degreased before installation into IB
wheel half assembly.
(1) Heat the wheel hub ID area to 220°F (104°C) maximum using either an oven
or P/N 2558450 wheel hub heating fixture. When using the wheel hub
heating fixture, preheat for a period of two to three minutes prior to insertion
into wheel hub. Time required to heat wheel hub with fixture will be 60 - 70
seconds.
(2) Cool the tapered bearing cup for a minimum of five minutes in either liquid
nitrogen or chilled alcohol. Submerging the tapered bearing cup in alcohol
while being chilled is the preferred method, as it will prevent the formation of
frost on the tapered bearing cup during its installation in the IB wheel half
assembly.
(3) Place the chilled tapered bearing cup in the heated wheel hub. Press the
tapered bearing cup into the wheel using the P/N 2558111 tapered bearing
cup driver and the P/N 2558442 wheel hub support oriented as shown in
Figure 612. Use an arbor press to seat the tapered bearing cup against the
shoulder in the wheel hub.
D. After the tapered bearing cup (195) and IB wheel half assembly (190) reach room
temperature, check with a feeler gage to be certain that the tapered bearing cup is
seated against the shoulder. A 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) maximum clearance, that
does not exceed 3/4 of the bearing periphery, is permissible.
E. Apply a light film of bearing grease per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) to the ID of
the tapered bearing cup (195) to prevent corrosion.

Page 622
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

TAPERED BEARING CUP DRIVER

INBOARD WHEEL
HALF ASSEMBLY

WHEEL HUB SUPPORT

LAG-5156

IB Tapered Bearing Cup Removal


Figure 611

Page 623
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

INBOARD WHEEL
HALF ASSEMBLY TAPERED BEARING CUP DRIVER

WHEEL HUB SUPPORT

LAG-5157

IB Tapered Bearing Cup Installation


Figure 612

Page 624
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 625
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.9 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Hub OD Turn Repair
NOTE: If a bearing bore repair has previously been performed, the minimum hub wall
thickness defining the limits of this repair must be determined based on the
remaining parent aluminum material at the bearing bore ID. All future bearing
bore repairs may be limited by the minimum hub wall thickness defined in
Figure 613.
A. Extensive damage to the hub OD may be repaired by a turn repair as shown in
Figure 613. Remove only the material necessary to cleanup the damage.
Dimensional limits may not be exceeded.
B. Smoothly blend rough edges at the termination point of the machined repair.
C. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove smeared metal per the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).
D. NDT inspect the machined surfaces for cracks per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
No cracks are permitted.
E. Shot peening of the repaired area is recommended to obtain the maximum service
life following repair. Shot peening instructions are defined in outline number 2.24.
F. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.

Page 626
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

1.50 (38.1) MATERIAL


REMOVED

MACHINE MATERIAL PARALLEL TO SMOOTHLY BLEND


EXISTING AS-FORGED HUB SURFACE. TERMINATION POINT OF
THE HUB OD IS FORGED TO A DRAFT THE TURNED REPAIR
ANGLE OF 3 ± 1 DEGREES.
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5158 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Required Value
Dimension Inch (mm)
T (Minimum Hub Wall Thickness) 0.639 (16.23) minimum
R (Minimum Machined Radius) 1.50 (38.1) minimum
D (Tangency Depth for Machined Radius) 3.125 (79.38)
All measurements taken to determine wall thickness must be taken 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) from end of hub.
When measuring diameters to determine hub wall thickness, a minimum of two measurements for each
diameter (0 and 90 degrees) must be obtained.
When directly measuring the hub wall thickness, a minimum of four measurements must be obtained,
equally spaced around the circumference.
Turn Repair Dimensional Limits for IB Wheel Hub OD
Figure 613

Page 627
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.10 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Grease Seal Seat and Snap Ring Groove Bushing
Repair
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup (195) and bearing bore should be inspected and repaired
prior to performing this repair.
A. Damage and wear to the grease seal seat and snap ring groove may be repaired
by removing the damaged material and installing a locally manufactured bushing.
B. Machine the damaged area as shown in Figure 614, View 1. Damage and wear
must completely cleanup at these dimensions. No additional material removal is
permitted.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
D. Locally fabricate a bushing as shown in Figure 614, View 2.
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE ADAPTER
INTO THE CAVITY OF THE IB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY (190) TO
PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
E. Heat the IB wheel half assembly (190) to 220°F (104°C) maximum, and cool the
bushing to -30°F (-34°C) maximum. Press the bushing into the wheel. ALS
suggests a procedure similar to that used for tapered bearing cup (195) installation,
outline number 2.8, be used. Support the wheel in a similar fashion. Use an
evenly-distributed load on the bushing during assembly to prevent deforming the
bushing.

Page 628
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.51 - 0.53
(13.0 - 13.5)
0.015 (0.38)
DAMAGE AREA
SEE DETAIL A FREE STATE

4.66 - 4.67
(118.4 - 118.6)

6.438 - 6.440 FLUSH WITH 6.449 - 6.451


(163.53 - 163.58) BEARING BORE (163.80 - 163.86)

0.06 - 0.09 0.28 (7.1)


WHEEL SPLIT (1.5 - 2.3) R MIN
LINE MATING
FACE

VIEW 1
0.05 - 0.07
WHEEL MACHINING
(1.3 - 1.8)
REQUIREMENTS
0.05 - 0.06
0.120 (3.05) (1.3 - 1.5)
0.090 (2.29) R

0.035 (0.89)
0.015 (0.38) R
NOTES:
MATERIAL:
STEEL MUST MEET STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 6.18 - 6.19
OF 65,000 PSI (4,482 BAR) ULTIMATE TENSILE 0.100 - 0.110
(157.0 - 157.2)
STRENGTH MIN. (2.54 - 2.80)
6.23 - 6.25
0.22 - 0.24 (158.2 - 158.8)
PROTECTIVE FINISH: (5.6 - 6.1)
CADMIUM PLATE PER QQ-P-416 TYPE I, CLASS 3. DETAIL A

DIMENSIONAL LIMITS AND SURFACE TEXTURE CHAMFER


DESIGNATIONS APPLY AFTER PROTECTIVE FINISH. 0.010 (0.25)
MAX AT 45°
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL DIAMETERS VIEW 2
SHOWN ON A COMMON CENTERLINE SHALL BE BUSHING FABRICATION
CONCENTRIC WITHIN 0.005 (0.13) FULL INDICATOR REQUIREMENTS
MOVEMENT.

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5176B MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Grease Seal Seat Bushing Repair


Figure 614

Page 629
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.11 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Grease Seal Seat and Snap Ring Groove Epoxy
Repair
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup (195) and bearing bore should be inspected and repaired
prior to performing this repair.
A. Damage and wear to the grease seal seat and snap ring groove may be repaired
by removing the damaged material and replacing it with epoxy.
B. Machine the damaged area as required to remove the damage. Do not exceed the
dimensional limits defined in Figure 615, View 1. Repaired surface should be kept
rough for bonding of the epoxy material.
C. Mask area to shield the tapered bearing cup (195).
D. Sandblast the repair area to a 60 - 80 microinches (1.5 - 2.0 µm) finish using
siliceous sand, grit range 70 - 270.
E. Clean and degrease area per the Cleaning section.
F. Build the repair area up with one part epoxy EC-2214 Hi-Temp or equivalent.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
G. Oven cure at 250° ± 5°F (121° ± 3°C) for 40 ± 1 minutes.
H. Restore the grease seal seat diameter and the snap ring groove by machining the
epoxy material to the dimensions shown in Figure 615, View 2.
I. Inspect epoxy for proper bonding. Minor voids in epoxy after machining are
acceptable.
J. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.

Page 630
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DAMAGE AREA

DIM “G”
4.66 (118.4)
MIN
R DIA “A”
6.44 (163.6)
MAX DIM “E

DIM “F” DIA “B”

DIM “D”
TO WHEEL
DIA “C”
SPLIT LINE

VIEW 2
FINISH MACHINING OF
EPOXY REPAIR
0.28 (7.1)
0.06 – 0.09
R MIN
(1.5 – 2.3)
WHEEL SPLIT
LINE MATING
FACE
VIEW 1
WHEEL REPAIR LIMITS
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5177A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Diameter “A” Diameter “B” Diameter “C” Dimension “D”


Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
6.14 - 6.16 6.09 6.10 Machine flush with 4.75 - 4.79
(156.0 - 156.5) (154.7 - 154.9) bearing bore (120.7 - 121.7)
Dimension “E” Dimension “F” Dimension “G” R (Radius)
Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
0.215 - 0.250 0.05 0.07 0.05 - 0.06 0.015 - 0.035
(5.46 - 6.35) (1.3 - 1.8) (1.3 - 1.5) (0.38 - 0.89)

Epoxy Repair of IB Grease Seal Seat Area


Figure 615

Page 631
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.12 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Spoke Turn Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

2.13 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tie Bolt Hole Ream Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, corrosion, or wear in the tie bolt hole may be repaired by reaming. Repair
limits and required machining of the spotface chamfer and mating face radius are
shown in Figure 616.
B. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.

0.020 (0.51)
0.010 (0.25) X 45° CHAMFER
32 (0.8 µm)
0.140 (3.56)
0.100 (2.54) R

REPAIR TO A MAXIMUM
DIAMETER OF 0.605 (15.37)

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5159 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Tie Bolt Hole Ream Repair


Figure 616

Page 632
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 633
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.14 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, corrosion, or wear in the tie bolt hole or spotface of the tie bolt hole may
be repaired using a repair bushing. Two oversize repairs are available.
B. As required, machine the damaged tie bolt hole and tie bolt hole spotface to the
dimensions shown in Figure 617. Machine the spotface chamfer and the mating
face radius as shown. If the repair limits are exceeded, the wheel half must be
scrapped.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
D. Locally fabricate bushing to the requirements of Figure 618 ensuring the OD shank
of the bushing is machined to achieve the specified press fit when the bushing is
installed in the repaired tie bolt hole.
E. Coat the OD and flange of the repair bushing with zinc chromate primer per Federal
Specification TT-P-1757 and then press the bushing into the tie bolt hole while the
primer is still wet. The bushing flange should be fully seated against the tie bolt
hole spotface.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.

Page 634
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “C”

0.130 (3.30)
0.110 (2.79) R

0.020 (0.51)
32 (0.8 µm) X 45° CHAMFER
0.140 (3.56) 0.010 (0.25)
0.100 (2.54) R

DIA “A” THRU


DIA “B” COUNTERBORE
TO DEPTH SHOWN AS
DIMENSION “C”

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5160 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

First Oversize Repair Second Oversize Repair


Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
DIA “A” - Tie Bolt Thru Hole 0.655 - 0.645 (16.64 - 16.38) 0.680 - 0.670 (17.27 - 17.02)
Diameter
DIA “B” - Tie Bolt Hole 1.35 - 1.33 (34.3 - 33.8) 1.35 - 1.33 (34.3 - 33.8)
Counterbore Diameter
DIM “C” - Tie Bolt Hole Flange 1.07 - 1.05 (27.2 - 26.7) 1.03 - 1.01 (26.2 - 25.7)
Thickness

Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair Wheel Machining Requirements


Figure 617

Page 635
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

PERPENDICULAR WITHIN
0.0005 (0.013)

0.050 (1.27)
0.030 (0.76) X 45° CHAMFER

40 (1.02 µm)

DIA “D”
DIA “E” DIA “F”
THRU DIA “F” MUST BE CONCENTRIC
WITH DIA “D” AND DIA “E” WITHIN
0.004 (0.10) TOTAL INDICATOR
READING
DIM “H”
0.010 (0.25) R MAX
DIM “G”
MATERIAL:
4130 STEEL OR EQUIVALENT
HEAT TREAT:
90,000 PSI (6,205 BAR) ULTIMATE
TENSILE STRENGTH MIN
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5161C MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

First Oversize Repair Second Oversize Repair


Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
DIA “D” - Repair Bushing Thru 0.595 - 0.585 (15.11 - 14.86) 0.595 - 0.585 (15.11 - 14.86)
Hole Diameter
DIA “E” - Repair Bushing Flange 1.130 - 1.120 (28.70 - 28.45) 1.130 - 1.120 (28.70 - 28.45)
OD
DIA “F” - Repair Bushing Shank Machine DIA “F” to a 0.001 - Machine DIA “F” to a 0.001 -
OD 0.003 (0.03 - 0.08) press fit with 0.003 (0.03 - 0.08) press fit with
the machined tie bolt hole the machined tie bolt hole
(DIA “A” of Figure 617) (DIA “A” of Figure 617)
DIM “H” - Repair Bushing Flange 0.060 - 0.050 (1.52 - 1.27) 0.100 - 0.090 (2.54 - 2.29)
Thickness
DIM “G” - Repair Bushing Overall 0.93 - 0.91 (23.6 - 23.1) 0.97 - 0.95 (24.6 - 24.1)
Length
Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair Bushing Machining Requirements
Figure 618

Page 636
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.15 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tie Bolt Hole Spotface Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, wear, or corrosion on the tie bolt spotface may be repaired by machining
the counterbore diameter to the depth limit shown in Figure 619. Dimensional
requirements for the counterbore are as shown. The chamfer on the tie bolt hole
diameter must be reestablished.
B. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
C. For more extensive damage, the tie bolt hole bushing repair method per outline
number 2.14 may be used to repair the tie bolt hole spotface.

1.11 (28.19)
MIN

0.130 (3.30)
0.110 (2.79) R

0.020 (0.51)
X 45° CHAMFER
0.010 (0.25)

COUNTERBORE DIA
1.35 (34.3)
1.33 (33.8)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5162 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Tie Bolt Hole Spotface Repair


Figure 619

Page 637
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.16 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tie Bolt Hole Mating Face Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

2.17 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Wheel Seal Packing Groove Blend Repair
A. Minor damage in area “A” of Figure 620 may be repaired by local polishing per
outline number 2.2. Repairs shall be limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a
minimum of 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) untouched material between repairs. Surface
finish of repaired areas shall be 32 microinches (0.8 µm) or better.
CAUTION: REMOVAL OF MATERIAL BEYOND LIMITS LISTED IN THIS AREA WILL
DIMENSIONALLY DESTROY THE SQUEEZE EFFECTED ON THE
PACKING AND WILL NULLIFY ITS SEALING ABILITY.
B. Damage to the nib, area “B,” may be repaired by intermittently blending out the
area of damage up to diameter shown. Repairs shall be limited to 2.00 inches
(50.8 mm) in length, with a maximum of four repaired areas allowed per wheel and
not exceeding 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) per quadrant.

AREA “A”

NIB AREA “B”

17.58 (446.5)
DIA MIN

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5170 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Seal Packing Groove Blend Repair


Figure 620

Page 638
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 639
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.18 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Wheel Seal Packing Groove Weld Repair
NOTE: Weld repair of cracks in the wheel seal packing groove is permitted only when
such damage can positively be identified to be caused by handling. This repair
shall not be used to repair cracks suspected to be of fatigue origin.
A. Damage in excess of repair limits permitted by metal removal shown in Figure 621
may be weld repaired. Enough of the original contour must remain around the
wheel to permit establishing the original contour by machining the weld material
deposits, unless capability exists to rework the contour as shown in Figure 621.
B. Prepare the damaged area for welding by removing all cracks and damaged metal.
Contour the area for optimum welding. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove
smeared metal per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Dye penetrant inspect to ensure
that cracks are completely removed.
C. Clean area to be welded. It is imperative that all paint, anodic film, dirt, oil, etc., be
removed from the weld area. Brush with a stainless steel bristle brush immediately
before welding.
D. Filler metal should be AWS ER-4043 rod. Cleanliness of rod is important. Do not
use rod that is heavily oxidized.
E. Weld using Gaseous Tungsten Arc Weld (GTAW) process.
F. Do not preheat wheel. Weld with a rapid traverse, keeping heat input low and
beads small. Immediately after each bead deposit, blast with air to cool the wheel
below 125°F (52°C).
G. Brush weld deposit with a stainless steel brush before each welding pass.
H. Do not post heat, stress relieve, or re-age the wheel after welding is complete. Do
not attempt to fill parent metal/weld metal junction cavity with weld metal.
I. Machine weld to original wheel contour as shown in Figure 621.
J. Dye penetrant inspect repaired area to ensure freedom from cracks and other
injurious defects.
K. After damaged area is built up by welding and machined as necessary, in all
probability, seams will be noticeable at the edge of the weld. Fill seams with epoxy
resin, such as Hysol EA 934NA.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
L. After the resin is cured, polish off excess with emery paper.
M. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.

Page 640
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5171 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Seal Packing Groove Machining of Weld Repair


Figure 621

Page 641
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.19 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Rotor Drive Key Boss Turn Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

2.20 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Rotor Drive Key Boss Repair
A. Damage to the sides and/or top of the rotor drive key boss may be repaired by local
blending per the following procedure:
(1) Blend out damage or corrosion on top or on either or both sides of the rotor
drive key boss. Adhere to the repair limits defined in Figure 622.
(2) Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
B. Damage to the rotor drive key boss exceeding the limits allowed for local blend
repair may be repaired by performing an epoxy repair per the following procedure.
Any combination of the three surfaces may be repaired on the same rotor drive key
boss.
(1) Blend out damage or corrosion on the sides or top of the rotor drive key boss
as required up to the limits of repair shown in of Figure 623, Views 2 and 3.
(2) Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
(3) Apply a thin layer of 10601 Aluminum Putty F, EC-2214 Hi-Temp, or
equivalent epoxy to all areas of the rotor drive key boss that are contacted by
the rotor drive key (130).
NOTE: Other equivalent heat-resistant epoxies may be used instead of
10601 Aluminum Putty F or EC-2214 Hi-Temp.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
(4) Spray the inside of the rotor drive key with LPS 3 oil, and attach the rotor
drive key to the rotor drive key boss with machine screws (135). Tighten to
the torque value specified in Figure 801. Refer to the Assembly section for
methods of retaining the machine screws.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
(5) After the rotor drive key is attached, remove excess extruded epoxy before it
cures.
(6) Allow sufficient time for the epoxy to cure (as instructed by the epoxy
manufacturer) before placing the wheel back in service or subjecting it to the
effects of cleaning solvents.

Page 642
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

6.50 (165.1) FROM


END OF BOSS

MAXIMUM TWO REPAIRS


PERMITTED THIS REGION

0.25 (6.4)
NO REPAIR
PERMITTED 0.50 (12.7) MAX
REPAIR WIDTH

0.25 (6.4) 1.00 (25.4) MIN DISTANCE


BETWEEN REPAIRS

NOTE: EACH SIDE MAY BE


REPAIRED AS SHOWN.
VIEW 1 ALLOWABLE REPAIR
ALLOWABLE REPAIR SIDES OF ROTOR DEPTH 0.020 (0.51) MAX.
AREA DRIVE KEY BOSS

6.50 (165.1) FROM


END OF BOSS

MAXIMUM TWO REPAIRS


PERMITTED THIS REGION

0.25 (6.4)
NO REPAIR 0.50 (12.7) MAX
PERMITTED REPAIR WIDTH

1.00 (25.4) MIN DISTANCE


0.25 (6.4) BETWEEN REPAIRS

NOTE: ALLOWABLE REPAIR


DEPTH 0.030 (0.76) MAX.

ALLOWABLE REPAIR
AREA
VIEW 2
TOP OF ROTOR
DRIVE KEY BOSS DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5348 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Local Repair of Rotor Drive Key Boss


Figure 622

Page 643
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

END OF
ROTOR DRIVE KEY

VIEW 1

TANGENCY OF
ROTOR DRIVE
KEY BOSS

VIEW 2 VIEW 3
EPOXY REPAIR LIMITS EPOXY REPAIR LIMITS
SIDES OF ROTOR TOP OF ROTOR
DRIVE KEY BOSS DRIVE KEY BOSS

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5185A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Epoxy Repair of Rotor Drive Key Boss


Figure 623

Page 644
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 645
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.21 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Rotor Drive Key Boss Screw Hole Repair
A. Screw holes may be repaired per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) with the following
limitations.
B. Two oversize repairs are allowed.
(1) Screw thread insert (first oversize) (136).
(2) Screw thread insert (second oversize) (136A).

2.22 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Tubewell Fuse Plug Hole Repair
A. Damage to the seal diameter of the fuse plug hole may be repaired by machining to
a maximum diameter of 0.332 inch (8.43 mm) and a depth of 0.420 inch
(10.67 mm).
B. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.

2.23 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Spoke Fuse Plug Hole Repair
A. Damaged threads in the fuse plug hole may be repaired by installing a threaded
repair bushing and preformed packing (181). Any or all holes may be repaired.
B. Machine the fuse plug port in the wheel as shown in Figure 624.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 2.25.
D. Locally manufacture a repair bushing as shown in Figure 624.
E. Install preformed packing (181) onto repair bushing.
F. Install repair bushing with preformed packing (181) into wheel. Torque to 75 - 85
pound-inches (8.5 - 9.6 N⋅m).

Page 646
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

FUSE PLUG HOLE

PER AS8879

PER AS8879

NOTES:
MATERIAL: 4130, 4140, 8740
HEAT TREATMENT: 180 - 200 KSI

PROTECTIVE COATING: CADMIUM PLATE PER LOCALLY-MANUFACTURED


QQ-P-416, TYPE II, CLASS 3. REPAIR BUSHING
DIMENSIONS AND SURFACE TEXTURE APPLY
AFTER PROTECTIVE COATING.
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5172B MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Machining Requirements for Spoke Fuse Plug Hole Repair


Figure 624

Page 647
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.24 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Shot Peen Instructions
A. ALS recommends shot peening be performed on the tubewell OD following fuse
plug release. In addition, shot peening should be performed locally on any repaired
area on the tubewell OD. Shot peening is also suggested for other areas of the
wheel following fuse release or local repair to obtain the maximum service life from
the wheel.
B. Figure 625 defines areas of the wheel that can be shot peened. Certain areas of
the wheel may not be shot peened due to the functionality of the surface. These
areas are indicated in Figure 625.
C. Perform shot peening per the procedures defined in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).

Page 648
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

THRU
2 HOLE
0.75 (19.1) 2
DIA AND 2 1
THREADED
HOLE 2

MACHINE BOLT
BOSS AREA FUSE 3
PLUG HOLE
(TYPICAL 4 PLACES)

3
2

3
4
2

0.06 (1.52)
FADEOUT

0.13 (3.30) 2

ENLARGED VIEW

2
NOTE: 3
TUBEWELL FUSE PLUG HOLES
APPLICABLE TO SOME WHEELS
NOT DEPICTED.
SHOT PEENING IS PROHIBITED 2
IN ANY PART OF HOLE.

NOTES:
A. AREAS INDICATED PERTAIN TO 1 SHOT PEENING RECOMMENDED AFTER ANY FUSE RELEASE.
ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE OF (LOCALIZED SHOT PEENING RECOMMENDED AFTER LOCAL REPAIR.)
WHEEL. OCCASIONAL SPRAY SHOT
IMPINGEMENT IS PERMISSIBLE ON 2 SHOT PEENING PROHIBITED. AREAS MUST BE MASKED TO
SURFACES NOT MARKED. AFFORD MAXIMUM PROTECTION, EXCEPT FOR AREAS TO BE
THERMAL SPRAY REPAIRED
B. SHOT PEENING OPTIONAL IN 3 SHOT PEENING SUGGESTED AFTER ANY FUSE RELEASE.
AREAS NOT SPECIFIED
(LOCALIZED SHOT PEENING SUGGESTED AFTER LOCAL REPAIR.)

4 PRIOR TO THERMAL SPRAY

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5173A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

IB Wheel Half Assembly Shot Peening Diagram


Figure 625
Page 649
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
2.25 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Surface Treatment Instructions
A. Areas on the wheel half assembly (190) where the anodic coating has been
removed due to wear or repair should be surface treated to restore the corrosion
protection system. Procedures for surface treatment are defined in the ALS
SPM (ATA 32-49-01).

2.26 IB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Paint Instructions


A. ALS strongly encourages operators to apply and maintain paint on the surfaces of
the wheel to assist in preventing corrosion. Primer and paint may be applied to the
wheel as shown in Figure 626.
B. Specific procedures for applying paint may be found in the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01). Procedures for complete paint replacement and local paint repair
are defined.

Page 650
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

3 1.125 O
MIN
3
2 PROVIDE COVERAGE
IN HOLE TO EXTENT
POSSIBLE. PRIMER ONLY.

2
1

3 1
3

3 NO PAINT
1 NO PAINT ON THESE SURFACES 1 ALLOWED ON
THREADS
2 PRIMER ONLY ON THESE SURFACES
INBOARD WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY
3 PRIMER AND/OR TOPCOAT OVERSPRAY ALLOWED

NOTE:
ALL OTHER SURFACES TO HAVE PRIMER AND TOPCOAT

LAG-5163A

IB Wheel Half Assembly Painting Diagram


Figure 626

Page 651
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
C. OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) Repair Instructions.

3.1 OB Wheel Half Assembly (190) - Repair Guidelines


A. Procedures for performing local blend repair, consisting of removing damaged or
corroded material, are presented in outline number 3.2.
B. Repairs for specific features of the wheel to address damage, corrosion, and
normal wear have also been developed. Figure 627 may be used as a quick
reference guide to locate a specific repair procedure.
C. For areas where repairs have not been developed, contact ALS Field Service
Engineering to determine if repairs are feasible. Digital photographs, if possible,
and measurement of the surface area and depth of damage must be submitted with
the request.

Page 652
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

HUB MATING PREFORMED PACKING


FACE RETAINER FLANGE HUBCAP SCREW
(3.3 - SHIM) (3.17 - TURN) HOLE (3.11)
(3.4 - THERMAL (3.18 - WELD)
SPRAY) SAFETY RELIEF
VALVE HOLE (3.20)

BEARING BORE
(3.5 - THERMAL SPRAY)
(3.6 - BUSHING)

BEARING CUP
REPLACEMENT (3.7)

GREASE SEAL SEAT


(3.9 - BUSHING)
(3.10 - THERMAL SPRAY)

INFLATION VALVE TIE BOLT HOLE SPOTFACE (3.15)


HOLE (3.19) (3.13 - REAM)
(3.14 - BUSHING)

STANDARD GUIDELINES: NOTE:


LOCAL BLEND (3.2) FEATURES ARE IDENTIFIED
SHOT PEEN (3.21) FOLLOWED BY REPAIR
SURFACE TREATMENT (3.22) INSTRUCTION OUTLINE
PAINT (3.23) NUMBER IN PARENTHESES
LAG-5206A

OB Wheel Half Assembly Features and Repair References


Figure 627

Page 653
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.2 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Local Blending Repair Instructions
A. For all repairs accomplished, remove only that amount of material required to blend
out the area of damage or corrosion and relieve all sharp corners or indentations,
that could result in stress concentrations. The repair should result in a smooth
contoured area with a minimum blend radius of 0.50 inch (12.7 mm). When not
specified, the surface finish of repaired areas must be equal to or better than the
adjacent untouched surface.
B. Figure 628 identifies areas of the OB wheel half assembly (85) that have specific
repairs permitted. Adhere to documented repair allowances.
C. Repaired areas that will subsequently be NDT inspected using dye penetrant
methods should be etched to remove smeared material. Procedures for performing
the etch process are defined in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
D. ALS recommends all repaired areas on the tubewell OD be shot peened following
repair. Shot peening of other areas is considered optional; however, it does provide
a service life enhancement relative to fatigue crack resistance. Shot peening
instructions are defined in outline number 3.21.
E. Surface treat all repaired areas of the OB wheel half assembly (85) per as defined
in outline number 3.22.

Page 654
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.35 (8.9) MIN


0.90 (22.9) REF
AREA “C” 1
0.030 (0.76)
AREA “D” 2 AREA “B”
0.030 (0.76) 0.030 (0.76)
AREA “A”
0.030 (0.76)
AREA “D” 2
AREA “L” 8
0.030 (0.76)
0.010 (0.25)
AREA “E” 3
0.010 (0.25)
0.26 (6.6) MIN
AREA “F” 4
0.030 (0.76)
6.50 (165.1) R

AREA “H”
0.35 (8.9) MIN 0.030 (0.76)

5.40 (137.2) R

AREA “J”
0.030 (0.76)

AREA “K” 7
0.030 (0.76)

AREA “I” 6
AREA “G” 5 0.060 (1.52)
0.030 (0.76)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5189A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Half Assembly Repair Limits


Figure 628 (Sheet 1 of 2)

Page 655
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

Note Area Description


1 C Repairs limited to 3.00 square inches (1,936 square mm) per repair.
Maximum of nine repairs per wheel. Repaired areas to be 3.00 inches (76.2
mm) apart minimum. It is not necessary to remove ridges or markings caused
by the normal working of the tire unless inspection shows this area to be
damaged. ALS recommends repairs in this area be shot peened following
repair.
2 D Minimum tubewell wall thickness to be maintained as shown. It is not
necessary to remove ridges or markings caused by the normal working of the
tire unless inspection shows this area to be damaged. ALS recommends
repairs to the tubewell OD be shot peened following repair.
3 E Local repair of spotface bearing surface is not permitted.
4 F Local repair limits may be exceeded up to the limits of spoke thickness
shown.
5 G Local repair limits may be exceeded up to the limits of spoke thickness
shown.
6 I Repairs limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a minimum of
3.00 inches (76.2 mm) of undamaged material between repairs.
7 K Repairs limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a minimum of
3.00 inches (76.2 mm) of undamaged material between repairs.
8 L Repairs limited to 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) in length with a minimum of
3.00 inches (76.2 mm) of undamaged material between repairs.
OB Wheel Half Assembly Local Blending Repair Limits
Figure 628 (Sheet 2 of 2)

Page 656
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 657
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.3 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Hub Mating Face Shim Repair
A. Damage or wear on the hub mating face surface that cannot be repaired by local
blending may be repaired by installing a repair shim (186A, 186B).
B. Machine the hub mating surface to remove damage or wear. Repair dimensional
requirements are defined in Figure 629. Dimension “A” requirements are listed in
0.010 inch (0.25 mm) increments. Do not exceed the maximum “A” dimension
noted. Surface finish of the machined area should be 125 microinch (3.2 µm)
maximum.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
D. Permanently mark the thickness of shim repair (186A, 186B) on the inner face of
the OB wheel half assembly (85) as shown in Figure 629.
E. Install one or a combination of two shims (186A, 186B) as required as shown in
Figure 629 to restore the desired hub mating surface assembly fit. No more than
two shims may be used together to make the repair. Repair shims may be
manufactured locally or obtained from ALS. Figure 630 defines the shim
requirements.
F. Cement the repair shim(s) (186A, 186B) to the wheel hub mating surface using a
thin film of 3M Cement No. EC-847 or EC-776. The surface of both the machined
wheel hub and the shim must be clean, dry, and free from foreign matter. Coat only
one side of the shim with cement and immediately install in the OB wheel half
assembly (85) using even pressure to ensure full contact. Maintain even pressure
until the cement sets. If two shims are used, cement them together prior to
assembly in the wheel. All surfaces other than those being bonded shall be free of
cement.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.

Page 658
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

“A”
0.061
(1.55)
MAX

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

PERMANENTLY
MARK THICKNESS
OF SHIM ON THIS 5.848 (148.54)
SURFACE 5.842 (148.39)
REF
OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY

NOMINAL SHIM
REPAIR INCREMENT “A” DIMENSION THICKNESS REQUIRED
1 0.018 - 0.021 (0.46 - 0.53) 0.020 (0.51)
2 0.028 - 0.031 (0.71 - 0.79) 0.030 (0.76)
3 0.038 - 0.041 (0.97 - 1.04) 0.040 (1.02)
4 0.048 - 0.051 (1.22 - 1.30) 0.050 (1.27)
5 0.058 - 0.061 (1.47 - 1.55) 0.060 (1.52)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5190 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Hub Machining Requirements for Shim Repair


Figure 629

5.99 - 6.01
(152.1 - 152.7)

6.89 - 6.91
(175.0 - 175.5)
MATERIAL:
TYPE 302 STAINLESS STEEL

ALS PART THICKNESS

WHEEL SHIM 0.018 - 0.022 (0.46 - 0.56)


(FIRST OVERSIZE) (186A)
WHEEL SHIM 0.028 - 0.032 (0.71 - 0.81)
(SECOND OVERSIZE) (186B)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5168 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Requirements for Hub Mating Face Repair Shims


Figure 630
Page 659
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.4 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Hub Mating Face Thermal Spray Repair
A. Damage or wear on the hub mating face surface that cannot be repaired by local
blending may be repaired by thermal spray repair.
B. Machine the hub mating surface to remove damage or wear. Repair dimensional
requirements are defined in Figure 631. Dimension “A” limits are set to ensure
resulting thermal spray thickness after machining is a minimum of 0.010 inch (0.25
mm) and a maximum of 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
C. Apply thermal spray to the repair area per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Buildup of
the thermal spray material must be sufficient to allow full cleanup of the repaired
area when final machining is complete.
D. Machine the thermal spray area to the dimensions shown in Figure 631. Full
cleanup of the repaired surface is required.
E. After thermal spray machining is complete, check coating for evidence of cracks,
pin holes, loosely adhering particles, blistering, or flaking. No defects are permitted.
F. Thermal spray repairs may be performed additional times, provided the original
thermal spray material is removed to bare aluminum and the dimensional limits of
Figure 631 are observed.
G. Thermal spray repairs may be performed in conjunction with shim (186A, 186B)
repairs as desired to restore the necessary hub mating surface assembly fit. The
incremental “A” dimension values defined in Figure 629 can result from a thermal
spray repair. However, the maximum “A” value defined applies prior to thermal
spray application and the resulting thermal spray coating may not exceed
0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

Page 660
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “A” MACHINE TO


WHEEL SPLIT LINE 0.010 (0.25) MIN,
MATING FACE 0.040 (1.02) MAX TO
CLEAN UP BEFORE
+0.002 +0.05 THERMAL SPRAY.
MACHINE TO 0.000 –0.003 (0.00 –0.08 )
AFTER THERMAL
SPRAY

THERMAL SPRAY
SURFACE

5.848 (148.54)
5.842 (148.39)
DIA REF
BREAK CORNERS TO OBTAIN
0.02 (0.5) MIN THICKNESS
THERMAL SPRAY AT CORNERS
AFTER FINISH MACHINING

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5191 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Hub Mating Surfaces Thermal Spray Repair


Figure 631

Page 661
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.5 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Bearing Bore Thermal Spray Repair
A. Damage to the bearing bore may be repaired by applying thermal spray coating.
B. Dimensional requirements for performing the repair are shown in Figure 632.
Finished machine dimensions as defined restore the wheel dimensionally to the
original configuration. In addition, the coating is limited to a thickness range. Two
repairs, identified as Primary and Alternate, are listed. The Primary repair always
produces coating thickness within the allowable range. The Alternate repair permits
additional cleanup of the thrust shoulder; however, the machining requirement for
“A” after thermal spray must be determined based on the value of “A” from wheel
cleanup machining. Maintaining the coating thickness within the allowable range
dictates the final machining requirements.
C. Machine the bearing bore diameter and thrust shoulder as required to remove
damage. Remove only enough material to fully remove the damage while
maintaining the dimensional limits specified in Figure 632.
D. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove smeared material per the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).
E. NDT inspect the machined surfaces for cracks per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
No cracks are permitted.
F. ALS suggests that the repaired surfaces be shot peened. Shot peening not only
provides fatigue crack resistance but enhances the bond strength of the thermal
spray. Shot peening instructions are defined in outline number 3.21.
G. Thoroughly clean and degrease the repaired surfaces.
H. Apply thermal spray to the repair area per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Buildup of
the thermal spray material must be sufficient to allow full cleanup of the repaired
area when final machining is complete.
I. Machine the thermal sprayed area to the dimensions shown in Figure 632. Full
cleanup of the repaired surface is required.
J. After thermal spray machining is complete, check coating for evidence of cracks,
pin holes, loosely adhering particles, blistering, or flaking. No defects are permitted.
K. Thermal spray repairs may be performed additional times, provided the original
thermal spray material is removed to bare aluminum and the dimensional limits of
Figure 632 are observed.
L. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
M. Install the tapered bearing cup (120) into the wheel half assembly per the tapered
bearing cup installation procedure defined in outline number 3.7.

Page 662
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

100 (2.5 µm)

DIM “A”

DIA “B”

0.135 (3.43)
0.115 (2.92) R

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5202 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Primary Repair
Wheel Machining Requirement Thermal Spray Machining Requirement
Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
“A” 0.95 (24.1) minimum 0.970 (24.64) minimum
0.96 (24.4) maximum 0.990 (25.15) maximum
“B” 4.952 (125.78) minimum 4.928 (125.17) minimum
5.008 (127.20) maximum 4.932 (125.27) maximum
Alternate Repair
(Requires Calculation of Final Machining Dimension)
Wheel Machining Requirement Thermal Spray Machining Requirement
Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
“A” Up to 0.93 (23.6) As determined by operator to meet both criteria
as follows:
(1) Final machining range 0.97 - 0.99
(24.6 - 25.2)
(2) Final coating thickness range 0.01 - 0.04
(0.3 - 1.0)
“B” Same as Primary Same as Primary

OB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore Thermal Spray Repair


Figure 632
Page 663
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.6 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Bearing Bore Bushing Repair
NOTE: Local repair under the cup in the bearing bore is not permitted.
A. Machine the bearing bore as shown in Figure 633, View 1. Remove only enough
material to cleanup the damage while maintaining the dimensional limits defined for
areas “A” and “B.”
B. Etch the repaired surfaces to remove smeared metal per the ALS SPM (ATA
32-49-01).
C. NDT inspect the repaired areas for cracks per the the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
No cracks are permitted.
D. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
E. Locally manufacture a bearing bore bushing, as shown in Figure 634, or obtain ALS
repair bearing bore bushing (125B). A light coat of SAE #10 oil may be applied as
a corrosion inhibitor if the bearing bore bushing will not be immediately installed in
the wheel.
NOTE: If bearing bore bushing has been coated with oil, thoroughly clean to remove all
oil residue prior to installing the tapered bearing cup (120).
F. Press tapered bearing cup into bearing bore bushing. Ensure that the tapered
bearing cup is fully seated in the bearing bore bushing using a feeler gage. No gap
is permitted at the thrust shoulder.
G. Machine the bearing bore bushing and tapered bearing cup (120) assembly as
shown in Figure 633, View 2. Dimensional requirements for machining of the OD,
“D”, and the back of the thrust shoulder, “C”, are defined in the table in Figure 633.
Adherence to these dimensions is critical to produce the proper press fit of this
assembly into the wheel and to position the bearing on the axle. Note that an
accurate measurement of “A” following wheel machining is necessary to determine
“C” and “D.”
H. Thoroughly clean all residue from the outside surface of the tapered bearing
cup (120) and bearing bore bushing (125B) assembly. Install the assembly into the
wheel per the tapered bearing cup installation procedures defined in outline
number 3.7.

Page 664
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “C”
WHEEL SPLIT LINE 100 (2.5 µm)
MATING FACE

100 (2.5 µm)

DIM “A”

DIA “B” DIA “D”

0.135 (3.43)
0.115 (2.92) R

0.155 (3.94)
0.135 (3.43) R

VIEW 1 VIEW 2
WHEEL MACHINING BEARING BORE BUSHING AND TAPERED
BEARING CUP ASSEMBLY MACHINING

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5192 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Requirements
Dimension Inch (mm)
“A” 0.91 (23.1) minimum
0.94 (23.9) maximum
“B” 4.970 (126.24) minimum
5.010 (127.25) maximum
“C” 1.748 (44.40) minus “A” minimum
1.754 (44.55) minus “A” maximum
“D” “B” plus 0.005 (0.13) minimum
“B” plus 0.010 (0.25) maximum
Bushing Repair of OB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore
Figure 633

Page 665
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.06 (1.5)
R MATERIAL:
0.05 (1.3)
4130 STEEL PER AMS 6350,
4.936 (125.37) AMS 6370, AMS 6371
4.934 (125.32) 4140 STEEL PER AMS 6381,
AVG DIA AMS 6382, AMS 6395
4.21 (106.93) 8630 STEEL PER AMS 6280,
5.12 4.19 (106.43) AMS 6281, AMS 6345
(130.0) DIA
C/L 8740 STEEL PER AMS 6322,
DIA
AMS 6323, AMS 6358
0.78 (19.8) 0.10 (2.5) 4340 STEEL PER AMS 6415,
0.77 (19.6) 0.09 (2.3) AMS 6414, AMS 6359

HEAT TREATMENT:
160,000 - 180,000 PSI
(11,032 - 12,411 BAR)
ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH
PER AMS-H-6875 OR
AMS 2759
0.06 (1.5) R

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5193A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Half Assembly Bearing Bore Repair Bushing


Figure 634

Page 666
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.7 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tapered Bearing Cup Replacement
CAUTION: SUPPORT THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY (85) IN THE AREA
DIRECTLY BENEATH THE WHEEL HUB WHILE APPLYING FORCE SO
THAT FORCE WILL NOT BE TRANSMITTED THROUGH SPOKES OF
WHEEL. SEE FIGURES 635 AND 636.
A. Remove defective tapered bearing cup (120).
NOTE: It is not mandatory that the OB wheel half assembly (85) be heated
prior to removal of tapered bearing cup. However, heating the wheel
allows much easier removal of the tapered bearing cup.
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE
ADAPTER INTO THE CAVITY OF THE OB WHEEL HALF
ASSEMBLY TO PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AT THE
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF 220°F (104°C) ANY LONGER THAN
NECESSARY FOR REMOVAL OF TAPERED BEARING CUP.
(1) Heat the wheel hub ID area to 220°F (104°C) maximum, using either an oven
or P/N 2558450 wheel hub heating fixture. When using the wheel hub
heating fixture, preheat for a period of two to three minutes prior to insertion
into wheel hub. Time required to heat wheel hub with fixture will be 60 - 70
seconds.
(2) Press the tapered bearing cup out of the OB wheel half assembly using the
P/N 2558440 tapered bearing cup driver and the P/N 2558442 wheel hub
support oriented as shown in Figure 635.
B. Inspect bearing bore. Repair of the bearing bore is required prior to installation of
the tapered bearing cup (120) if the diameter exceeds 4.933 inches (125.30 mm),
or damage is present due to cup spinning or corrosion.

Page 667
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.7 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tapered Bearing Cup Replacement
C. Install tapered bearing cup (120).
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE
TAPERED BEARING CUP INTO THE OB WHEEL HALF
ASSEMBLY (85) TO PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AT THE
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE OF 220°F (104°C) ANY LONGER THAN
NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF TAPERED BEARING CUP.
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup must be degreased before installation into
wheel.
(1) Heat the wheel hub ID area to 220°F (104°C) maximum, using either an oven
or P/N 2558450 wheel hub heating fixture. When using the wheel hub
heating fixture, preheat for a period of two to three minutes prior to insertion
into wheel hub. Time required to heat wheel hub with fixture will be 60 - 70
seconds.
(2) Cool the tapered bearing cup for a minimum of five minutes in either liquid
nitrogen or in chilled alcohol. Submerging the tapered bearing cup in alcohol
while being chilled is the preferred method, as it will prevent the formation of
frost on the tapered bearing cup during its installation in the OB wheel half
assembly.
CAUTION: SUPPORT THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AS SHOWN IN
FIGURE 636 IN THE AREA DIRECTLY BENEATH THE HUB
SO THAT THE FORCE WILL NOT BE TRANSMITTED
THROUGH THE WHEEL SPOKES.
(3) Place the chilled tapered bearing cup in the heated wheel hub. Press the
tapered bearing cup into the wheel using the P/N 2558440 bearing cup driver
and the P/N 2558442 wheel hub support oriented as shown in Figure 636.
Use an arbor press to seat the tapered bearing cup against the shoulder in
the wheel hub.
D. After the tapered bearing cup (120) and OB wheel half assembly (85) reach room
temperature, check with a feeler gage to be certain that the tapered bearing cup is
seated against the shoulder. A 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) maximum clearance, that
does not exceed 3/4 of the tapered bearing cup periphery, is permissible.
E. Apply a light film of bearing grease per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) to the ID of
the tapered bearing cup to prevent corrosion.

Page 668
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY TAPERED BEARING CUP DRIVER

WHEEL HUB
SUPPORT

LAG-5203
OB Tapered Bearing Cup Removal
Figure 635

OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY TAPERED BEARING CUP DRIVER

WHEEL HUB
SUPPORT

LAG-5204
OB Tapered Bearing Cup Installation
Figure 636

Page 669
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.8 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Hubcap Mating Face Machined Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

3.9 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Grease Seal Seat Bushing Repair
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup (120) and bore should be inspected and repaired prior to
performing this repair.
A. Damage and wear to the grease seal seat may be repaired by removing the
damaged material and installing a bushing.
B. Machine the damaged area as shown in Figure 637, View 1. Remove only enough
material on the diameter to completely remove the damage while maintaining the
dimensional limits defined.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
D. Locally fabricate a bushing as shown in Figure 637, View 2. Note that the OD of
the bushing must be machined to provide the desired interference fit with the
repaired wheel when installed. Also note that the bushing length must be
machined to ensure it does not interfere with the hubcap.
WARNING: WEAR HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES WHEN SETTING THE ADAPTER
INTO THE CAVITY OF THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY (85) TO
PROTECT HANDS FROM THE HOT WHEEL.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE OB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY AT THE MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE OF 220°F (104°C) ANY LONGER THAN NECESSARY
FOR INSTALLING THE BUSHING.
E. Heat the OB wheel half assembly to 220°F (104°C) maximum, and cool the bushing
to -30°F (-34°C) maximum. Press the bushing into the wheel. ALS suggests a
procedure similar to that used for tapered bearing cup (120) installation be used.
Support the wheel in a similar fashion. Use an evenly distributed load on the
bushing during assembly to prevent deforming the bushing.

Page 670
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

MACHINE LENGTH AS REQUIRED


TO ENSURE BUSHING IS FLUSH
WITH OR 0.020 (0.51)
BELOW HUBCAP FACE
0.035 (0.89)
0.015 (0.38) 0.015 (0.38) R
FREE STATE
WHEEL SPLIT
LINE MATING
FACE 0.06 (1.5)
0.03 (0.8) R FLUSH WITH
1.90 - 1.91 BEARING BORE
(48.3 - 48.5)
0.100 (2.54)
5.85 (148.6) MAX MACHINE DIA 0.075 (1.91)
5.65 (143.5) MIN TO PROVIDE
0.011 - 0.015
(0.28 - 0.38) 5.51 (140.0)
INTERFERENCE 5.50 (139.7) DIA
FIT BASED ON
REPAIR WHEEL
DIAMETER

0.06 (1.5)
0.120 (3.05) 0.04 (1.0) X 45°
0.090 (2.29) R

VIEW 2
BUSHING MACHINING
VIEW 1
WHEEL MACHINING
MATERIAL: PROTECTIVE FINISH:
STEEL MUST MEET CADMIUM PLATE PER
STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS QQ-P-416 TYPE I, CLASS 3
OF 65,000 PSI (4,482 BAR)
ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5194A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Half Assembly Grease Seal Seat Bushing Repair


Figure 637

Page 671
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.10 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Grease Seal Seat Thermal Spray Repair
NOTE: Tapered bearing cup (120) and bore should be inspected and repaired prior to
performing this repair.
A. Damage and wear to the grease seal seat may be repaired by removing the
damaged material and replacing it with thermal spray.
B. Dimensional requirements for performing the repair are shown in Figure 638.
Finished machine dimensions as defined restore the wheel dimensionally to the
original configuration. In addition, the coating is limited to a thickness range. Note
that the machining requirement for “A” after thermal spray must be determined
based on the value of “A” from wheel cleanup machining. Maintaining the coating
thickness within the allowable range dictates the final machining requirements.
C. Machine the grease seal seat diameter and thrust shoulder per the dimensions
defined in Figure 638. Damage must be fully removed while maintaining the
dimensional limits shown.
D. Thoroughly clean and degrease the repaired surfaces.
E. Apply thermal spray to the repair area per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01). Buildup of
the thermal spray material must be sufficient to allow full cleanup of the repaired
area when final machining is complete.
F. Machine the thermal sprayed area to the dimensions shown in Figure 638. Full
cleanup of the repaired surface is required.
G. After thermal spray machining is complete, check coating for evidence of cracks,
pin holes, loosely adhering particles, blistering, or flaking. No defects are permitted.
H. Thermal spray repairs may be performed additional times provided the original
thermal spray material is removed to bare aluminum and the dimensional limits of
Figure 638 are observed.
I. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.

Page 672
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

SEE VIEW 2

WHEEL SPLIT 0.03 (0.8)


LINE MATING 0.06 (1.5) R
FACE
0.01 (0.3)
0.03 (0.8) R
DIM “A”

DIA “B” DIA “B”

DIM “A” BREAK


TO WHEEL EDGE
SPLIT LINE
MATING FACE

VIEW 2
THERMAL SPRAY
MACHINING

VIEW 1
WHEEL MACHINING
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5195 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Machining Requirements
Wheel Machining Requirements Thermal Spray Machining Requirement
Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
“A” Up to 1.910 (48.51) As determined by operator to meet both criteria
as follows:
(1) Final machining range:
1.95 - 2.01 (49.5 - 51.1)
(2) Final coating thickness range:
0.01 - 0.04 (0.3 - 1.0)
“B” 5.524 (140.31) minimum 5.500 (139.70) minimum
5.580 (141.73) maximum 5.504 (139.80) maximum
OB Wheel Grease Seal Seat Thermal Spray Repair
Figure 638

Page 673
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.11 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Replacement of Screw Thread Inserts (115) and
Hubcap Screw Hole Repair
A. If the screw thread inserts (115) are damaged or loose, if the OB wheel half
assembly (85) is to be surface treated, or if the screw hole threads are damaged,
repairs may be accomplished by replacing the screw thread insert or by installing
oversized screw thread inserts (115A, 115B).
B. Remove the screw thread insert (115) using a screw extractor.
C. If repair of the screw thread insert (115) hole threads is required, machine the wheel
using either the first or second oversize repair as defined in Figure 639.
D. If required, surface treat the hole per outline number 3.22.
E. Install a new screw thread insert (115) or oversize insert (115A, 115B) as required.
The screw should be installed flush to 0.010 inch (0.25) below top of counterbore.
An installation tool can be fabricated locally as shown in Figure 639.

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-2880 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Assembly Hubcap Screw Hole Repair


Figure 639
Page 674
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.12 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Spoke Turn Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

3.13 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tie Bolt Hole Ream Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, corrosion, or wear in the tie bolt hole may be repaired by reaming. Repair
limits and required machining of the spotface chamfer and mating face radius are
shown in Figure 640.
B. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.

0.020 (0.51)
0.010 (0.25) X 45° CHAMFER
32 (0.8 µm)
0.140 (3.56)
R
0.100 (2.54)

REPAIR TO A MAXIMUM
DIAMETER OF 0.605 (15.37)

WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5181 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Tie Bolt Hole Ream Repair


Figure 640

Page 675
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.14 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, corrosion, or wear in the tie bolt hole or spotface of the tie bolt hole may
be repaired using a repair bushing. Two oversize repairs are available.
B. As required, machine the damaged tie bolt hole and tie bolt hole spotface to the
dimensions specified as shown in Figure 641. Machine the spotface chamfer and
the mating face radius as shown. If the repair limits are exceeded, the OB wheel
half assembly (85) must be scrapped.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
D. Locally fabricate a bushing to the requirements of Figure 642 ensuring the OD
shank of the bushing is machined to achieve the specified press fit when the
bushing is installed in the repaired tie bolt hole.
E. Coat the OD and flange of the repair bushing with zinc chromate primer per Federal
Specification TT-P-1757, then press the bushing into the tie bolt hole while the
primer is still wet. The bushing flange should be fully seated against the tie bolt
hole spotface.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.

Page 676
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

DIM “C”

0.130 (3.30)
0.110 (2.79) R

0.020 (0.51)
32 (0.8 µm) 0.010 (0.25) X 45° CHAMFER
0.140 (3.56)
0.100 (2.54) R

DIA “A” THRU


DIA “B” COUNTERBORE
TO DEPTH SHOWN AS
DIMENSION “C”
WHEEL SPLIT LINE
MATING FACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5182 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

First Oversize Repair Second Oversize Repair


Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
DIA “A” - Tie Bolt Thru Hole 0.655 - 0.645 (16.64 - 16.38) 0.680 - 0.670 (17.27 - 17.02)
Diameter
DIA “B” - Tie Bolt Hole 1.35 - 1.33 (34.3 - 33.8) 1.35 - 1.33 (34.3 - 33.8)
Counterbore Diameter
DIM “C” - Tie Bolt Hole Flange 1.07 - 1.05 (27.2 - 26.7) 1.03 - 1.01 (26.2 - 25.7)
Thickness
Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair Wheel Machining Requirements
Figure 641

Page 677
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

PERPENDICULAR WITHIN
0.0005 (0.013)

0.050 (1.27)
0.030 (0.76) X 45° CHAMFER

40 (1.02 µm)

DIA “D”
DIA “E” DIA “F”
THRU DIA “F” MUST BE CONCENTRIC
WITH DIA “D” AND DIA “E” WITHIN
0.004 (0.10) TOTAL INDICATOR
READING
DIM “H”
0.010 (0.25) R MAX
DIM “G”
MATERIAL:
4130 STEEL OR EQUIVALENT
HEAT TREAT:
90,000 PSI (6,205 BAR) ULTIMATE
TENSILE STRENGTH MIN
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5161C MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

First Oversize Repair Second Oversize Repair


Dimension Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
DIA “D” - Repair Bushing Thru 0.595 - 0.585 (15.11 - 14.86) 0.595 - 0.585 (15.11 - 14.86)
Hole Diameter
DIA “E” - Repair Bushing Flange 1.130 - 1.120 (28.70 - 28.45) 1.130 - 1.120 (28.70 - 28.45)
OD
DIA “F” - Repair Bushing Shank Machine DIA “F” to a Machine DIA “F” to a
OD 0.001 - 0.003 (0.03 to 0.08) press 0.001 - 0.003 (0.03 - 0.08 ) press
fit with the machined tie bolt hole fit with the machined tie bolt hole
(DIA “A” of Figure 641) (DIA “A” of Figure 641)
DIM “G” - Repair Bushing Overall 0.93 - 0.91 (23.6 - 23.1) 0.97 - 0.95 (24.6 - 24.1)
Length
DIM “H” - Repair Bushing Flange 0.060 - 0.050 (1.52 - 1.27) 0.100 - 0.090 (2.54 - 2.29)
Thickness
Tie Bolt Hole Bushing Repair Bushing Machining Requirements
Figure 642

Page 678
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.15 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tie Bolt Hole Spotface Repair
NOTE: Each tie bolt hole may be repaired independently of the other tie bolt holes to
the specified dimensional limits. All tie bolt holes may be repaired.
A. Damage, wear, or corrosion on the tie bolt spotface may be repaired by machining
the counterbore diameter to the depth limit shown in Figure 643. Dimensional
requirements for the counterbore are as shown. The chamfer on the tie bolt hole
diameter must be reestablished.
B. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
C. For more extensive damage, the tie bolt hole bushing repair method per outline
number 3.14 may be used to repair the tie bolt hole spotface.

1.11 (28.19)
MIN

0.130 (3.30)
0.110 (2.79) R

0.020 (0.51)
X 45° CHAMFER
0.010 (0.25)

COUNTERBORE DIA
1.35 (34.3)
1.33 (33.8)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5183 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Tie Bolt Hole Spotface Repair


Figure 643

Page 679
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.16 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Tie Bolt Hole Mating Face Repair
A. Repair procedures have not been established.

3.17 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Wheel Seal Packing Retainer Flange Turn Repair
A. Damage to the OD of the flange may be repaired by a turn repair up to the limits
shown in Figure 644.
B. If the damage to the flange OD is not extensive with respect to the amount of
circumference affected, at operator option local repairs may be made in lieu of a
turn repair. The same dimensional limits of Figure 644 apply.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.

0.200 (5.08)
REPAIR AREA

0.050 (1.27)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5196 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Wheel Seal Packing Groove Turn Repair


Figure 644

Page 680
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.18 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Wheel Seal Packing Retainer Flange Weld Repair
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR SHALL NOT BE USED TO REPAIR CRACKS
SUSPECTED TO BE OF FATIGUE ORIGIN.
CAUTION: ALS RECOMMENDS WELDERS PERFORMING THIS REPAIR BE
CERTIFIED TO AN INDUSTRY STANDARD APPROPRIATE FOR THIS
APPLICATION.
A. Damage to the preformed packing retainer flange caused by handling that is in
excess of the repair limits specified in outline number 3.17 may be weld repaired.
Enough of the original contour must remain around the wheel to permit establishing
the original contour by machining the weld material deposits unless capability exists
to rework the contour as illustrated in Figure 645.

Page 681
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.18 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Wheel Seal Packing Retainer Flange Weld Repair
B. Weld repair per the following instructions:
(1) Remove the minimum metal required to cleanup all damaged metal and
cracks caused by material handling and to ensure optimum welding. Inspect
machined area for cracks per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
(2) Clean area to be welded. All paint, anodic film, dirt, oil, etc., must be
removed from the weld area. Brush with a stainless steel bristle brush
immediately before welding.
(3) Filler metal should be AWS ER-4043 rod. Cleanliness of the rod is important.
Do not use a rod that is heavily oxidized.
(4) Weld using GTAW process.
(5) Do not preheat wheel. Weld with a rapid traverse, keeping heat input low and
beads small. Immediately after each bead deposit, blast with air to cool the
wheel below 125°F (52°C).
(6) Brush weld deposit with a stainless steel brush before each welding pass.
(7) Do not post heat, stress relieve, or re-age the wheel after welding is
complete. Do not attempt to fill parent metal/weld metal junction cavity with
weld metal.
(8) Machine weld to original wheel contour as shown in Figure 645.
(9) Inspect weld repaired area for cracks and other injurious defects per the ALS
SPM (ATA 32-49-01). No defects are allowed.
(10) Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
(11) Seams will likely occur at the weld to parent metal interface. Fill seams with
epoxy resin, such as Hysol EA 934NA.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
(12) Dry blast the surface that the resin is to be applied to with #80 grit, followed
by a wash with methyl-ethyl-ketone.
(13) Apply epoxy resin and allow to cure at room temperature. At a room
temperature of 70° - 80°F (21° - 27°C), the resin will require 18 hours to reach
full cure.
(14) After the resin is cured, polish off excess with emery paper.
(15) Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.

Page 682
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

5.3° ± 0.5°
0.09 (2.3) R

15°
0.23 (5.8)
18.44 (468.38)
18.40 (467.36) DIA
0.060 (1.52) R

18.00 (457.2) 63 (1.6 µm)


DIA REF
0.060 (1.52) R
0.06 (1.5)
0.02 (0.5)

PERMISSIBLE
MISMATCH
0.015 (0.38)
0.000 (0.00)

0.72 (18.3) WHEEL SPLIT LINE


MATING FACE

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5197 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Wheel Seal Packing Groove Machining After Weld Repair


Figure 645

Page 683
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.19 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Inflation Valve Hole Repair
A. Damage to the inflation valve port may be repaired by machining the port to an
oversize condition and installing a locally-fabricated repair bushing.
B. Machine the inflation valve port as shown in Figure 646, View 1.
C. Surface treat the repaired area per outline number 3.22.
D. Locally fabricate a repair bushing per the instructions shown in Figure 646, View 2.
E. Install prelubricated preformed packing (26) onto repair bushing.
F. Coat threads of repair bushing with a solid-film, air-cured lubricant conforming to
MIL-L-23398 or MIL-L-46147 prior to installation. Lubricant should not contact
preformed packing (26).
G. Install repair bushing with preformed packing (26) into threaded boss. Torque to
200 ± 25 pound-inches (22.6 ± 2.8 N⋅m).
H. Check for leaks. No leakage allowed.

Page 684
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

VIEW 1
WHEEL MACHINING

MATERIAL:
ALUMINUM ALLOY
2024-T3510, T3511, T4, T8510, T8511, T81,
T6, OR T851 PER AMS-QQ-A-200 OR AMS-QQ-A-225

PROTECTIVE COATING:
SULFURIC ANODIZE PER MIL-A-8625, TYPE II

VIEW 2
INFLATION VALVE HOLE REPAIR BUSHING

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5198 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Inflation Valve Hole Repair


Figure 646
Page 685
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.20 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Safety Relief Valve Hole Repair
A. The safety relief valve hole repair procedure is identical to the inflation valve hole
repair procedure.

3.21 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Shot Peen Instructions


A. ALS recommends shot peening be performed on the tubewell OD following fuse
plug release. In addition, shot peening should be performed locally on any repaired
area on the tubewell OD. Shot peening is also suggested for other areas of the
wheel half assembly following fuse release or local repair to obtain the maximum
service life from the wheel half assembly.
B. Figure 647 defines areas of the wheel half assembly that can be shot peened.
Certain areas of the wheel half assembly may not be shot peened due to the
functionality of the surface and are indicated in Figure 647.
C. Perform shot peening per the procedures defined in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).

Page 686
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.13 (3.3)
3

0.06 (1.52)
FADEOUT

2
2

3
3
ENLARGED VIEW

NOTES:
A. AREAS INDICATED PERTAIN TO 1 SHOT PEENING RECOMMENDED AFTER ANY FUSE RELEASE.
ENTIRE CIRCUMFERENCE OF (LOCALIZED SHOT PEENING RECOMMENDED AFTER LOCAL REPAIR.)
WHEEL. OCCASIONAL SPRAY SHOT
IMPINGEMENT IS PERMISSIBLE ON 2 SHOT PEENING PROHIBITED. AREAS MUST BE MASKED TO AFFORD
SURFACES NOT MARKED. MAXIMUM PROTECTION, EXCEPT FOR AREAS TO BE THERMAL
SPRAY REPAIRED.
B. SHOT PEENING OPTIONAL IN 3 SHOT PEENING SUGGESTED AFTER ANY FUSE RELEASE.
AREAS NOT SPECIFIED. (LOCALIZED SHOT PEENING SUGGESTED AFTER LOCAL REPAIR.)

4 PRIOR TO THERMAL SPRAY


DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5199A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

OB Wheel Half Assembly Shot Peening Diagram


Figure 647
Page 687
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
3.22 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Surface Treatment Instructions
A. Areas on the OB wheel half assembly (85) where the anodic coating has been
removed due to wear or repair should be surface treated to restore the corrosion
protection system. Procedures for surface treatment are defined in the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).

3.23 OB Wheel Half Assembly (85) - Paint Instructions


A. ALS strongly encourages operators to apply and maintain paint on the surfaces of
the OB wheel half assembly (85) to assist in preventing corrosion. Primer and paint
may be applied to the OB wheel half assembly as shown in Figure 648.
B. Specific procedures for applying paint may be found in the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01). Procedures for complete paint replacement and local paint repair
are defined.

Page 688
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

3
1.125
2
MIN O

2
PROVIDE COVERAGE IN HOLE 3
TO EXTENT POSSIBLE.
PRIMER ONLY.

2 0.38 O

1 NO PRIMER AND NO TOPCOAT

2 PRIMER ONLY
3
3 PRIMER AND/OR TOPCOAT OVERSPRAY ALLOWED

ALL OTHER SURFACES TO HAVE PRIMER AND TOPCOAT


OUTBOARD WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY

LAG-5184A

OB Wheel Half Assembly Painting Diagram


Figure 648
Page 689
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
D. Rotor Drive Key (130) Repair Instructions.

4.1 Rotor Drive Key (130) - Repair Instructions


A. Rotor drive keys (130) may be repaired to remove corrosion and to smooth sharp
edges caused by wear.
B. Vapor blast the rotor drive key (130) to remove remove scaling chrome plating and
or corrosion.
C. Grind smooth any areas with abrupt changes due to wear of the rotor assemblies
on the sides of the rotor drive key (130). Maximum allowable depth of the wear
spot is defined in the Check section.
D. Protect rotor drive keys (130) from corrosion either by lightly coating with SAE #10
or #20 oil or by painting with silicon aluminum, heat resisting paint per
Specification TT-P-28. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for application of the
paint. Touch up local areas with a brush. Dry film thickness of the paint shall be
0.0080 to 0.0012 inch (0.020 to 0.030 mm).

E. Machine (Tie) Bolt (60) Repair Instructions.

5.1 Machine Bolt (60) - Cadmium Plate Repair Instructions


A. Restoration of the cadmium plating may be done at operator option. Cadmium
plating provides lubricity to the threaded joint, critical for achieving proper preload
during assembly, and serves as a corrosion protection barrier. Refer to the Check
section for ALS recommendations on the need to replate the machine bolts (60).
B. Specific procedures for restoring the cadmium plating on the machine bolts (60)
may be found in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).

Page 690
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
F. Tie Bolt Self-Locking Nut (50B) Repair Instructions.

6.1 Self-Locking Nut (50B) - Repair Instructions


A. Restoration of the cadmium plating may be done at operator option. Cadmium
plating provides lubricity to the threaded joint, critical for achieving proper preload
during assembly, and serves as a corrosion protection barrier. Refer to the Check
section for ALS recommendations on the need to replate the self-locking
nuts (50B).
B. Specific procedures for restoring the cadmium plating on the self-locking nuts (50B)
may be found in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).

Page 691
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
G. Heat Shield (160) Repair Instructions.

7.1 Heat Shield (160) - Repair Instructions


A. Remove dents and distortions from the heat shields (160) and restore the original
contour to the extent possible. Ensure no interference exists between the heat
shield and the brake or contact with the wheel.
B. Cracks may be repaired by welding. Use appropriate weld techniques and
materials for stainless steel. All welded areas must be ground flush and smooth to
prevent chafing and damage to the wheel or interference with the brake.
C. Figure 649 defines rework allowed to remove small corner cracks and incorporate a
ridge (Section B-B) that serves to stiffen the heat shield (160) and eliminate
interference with the rotor drive key boss on the wheel. Original design of the heat
shield did not incorporate rubber bumpers. Holes may be added to the heat shield
as shown at operator option to allow installation of rubber bumpers (161).
D. Silicone rubber may be added to the tubewell adjacent to the rotor drive key boss to
provide a protective layer between the heat shield (160) and the wheel and
minimize wheel chafing. Figure 650 shows a typical application. Install the
protective layer per the following steps.
(1) Remove loose contaminates and degrease the tubewell per the Cleaning
section.
(2) Apply a small amount of silicone rubber to the tubewell ID approximately
6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from the edge and adjacent to each rotor drive key
boss.
(3) Apply a small amount of silicone rubber to the tubewell ID approximately
6.00 inches (152.4 mm) from the edge and centered between the rotor drive
key bosses.
(4) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for application and cure time. Silicone
rubber, such as General Electric RTV 159, 106, 116 or 156, Dow Corning
RTV 450 or 500, or equivalent should be used.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.

Page 692
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

0.27 (6.9)
TYPICAL - 2 PLACES 0.25 - 0.26 (6.4 - 6.6)
DIA HOLE - 2 PLACES

3.80 (96.5)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-5200 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Heat Shield Repair


Figure 649

Page 693
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

LAG-2877

Silicone Rubber Application on IB Wheel Half Assembly


Figure 650

Page 694
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 695
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR
H. Grease Seal Anti-Rotation Nib Repair.

8.1 Grease Seal (31, 40) - Anti-Rotation Nib Repair Instructions


A. Damage to the anti-rotation nib may be repaired using either of two methods as
defined below.
B. Method 1 repair procedure uses a sheet metal screw. Figure 651, View 1 defines
the repair configuration.
(1) Remove the remaining nib by grinding flush to the adjacent surface.
(2) Using a No. 26 drill with a 0.147 inch (3.73 mm) nominal diameter, drill
through the grease seals (31, 40) at one place as shown. Circumferential
location is optional.
(3) Install a sheet metal screw as shown. Requirements for the configuration of
the screw including plating are shown in Figure 651.
(4) After installation of the screw, grind sharp end flush with the grease
seal surface.
C. Method 2 repair procedure uses a blind pop rivet and recessed washer (41).
Figure 651, View 2 defines the repair configuration.
(1) Remove the remaining nib by grinding flush to the adjacent surface.
(2) Drill a hole through the grease seals (31, 40) as shown in Figure 651.
Circumferential location is optional.
(3) Counterbore bottom of grease seal as shown.
(4) Install a rivet through the recessed washer and hole in the grease seal using
a blind rivet fastener tool.

Page 696
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

GRIND END WASHER (41)


0.15 (3.8) 0.127 (3.23)
0.18 (4.6) OFF FLUSH 0.132 (3.35) DIA HOLE
0.270 (6.86)
0.290 (7.37) DIA
COUNTERBORE TO
DIMENSION SHOWN

0.15 (3.8) 0.020 (0.51)


0.18 (4.6) 0.040 (1.02)
SCREW DIMENSION REF
COUNTERBORE DEPTH
HEAD DIA 0.322 - 0.306 (8.18 - 7.77)
0.125 (3.18) DIA
HEAD HEIGHT 0.115 - 0.105 (2.92 - 2.67)
BLIND (POP)
NOMINAL SHANK DIA 0.164 (4.17)
ALUMINUM RIVET
NO. 8 SHEET METAL SCREW SUCH AS MS51861-34, WITH 0.219 (5.56) MAX
OR EQUIVALENT SCREW WITH DIMENSIONS AS SHOWN. GRIP LENGTH
SCREW MUST BE PLATED WITH CADMIUM, ZINC, OR
TIN. DRIVE FORM OPTIONAL. VIEW 2
METHOD 2 REPAIR
VIEW 1
METHOD 1 REPAIR
DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH
LAG-5201 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Grease Seal Anti-Rotation Nib Repair


Figure 651

Page 697
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
REPAIR

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 698
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
1. Tabular Definition of Assembly Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  The Assembly section is presented using a tabular format to organize
Overview the assembly instructions. A breakdown of the tabular format is as
follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the assembly
instructions summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the instructions that should be followed to
properly assemble the specified part or sub-assembly.
Breakdown of  Assembly paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Assembly Paragraph Page
Paragraphs
2.A. General Assembly Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
2.B. Inboard (IB) Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines . . . . 703
2.C. Outboard (OB) Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines . 706
2.D. Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
2.E. Bearing Assembly Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
2.F. Inflating the Tire Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
2.G. Storage Instructions Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

Page 701
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
2. Assembly Instructions.
A. General Assembly Guidelines.

1.1 General Instructions Applicable to the Assembly Section


NOTE: All item numbers in parentheses refer to the exploded view shown in the
Illustrated Parts List section.
A. Assemble the main wheel assembly, using the utmost care, on a clean, flat
surface that will not scratch or nick the wheel halves.
B. Observe the torque values specified in Figure 801.
C. Lubricate parts per the Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS) Standard Practices
Manual (SPM) (ATA 32-49-01) and Figure 801 of this Component Maintenance
Manual (CMM).
(1) Lubricate machine bolts, nuts, and washers as shown in Figure 801 prior
to each installation. Use antiseize compound at full strength. Do not
dilute.
(2) Coat preformed packings (20, 26, 65, 70, 175, 181) per the ALS SPM
(ATA 32-49-01).
(3) Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) to lubricate tapered roller bearings
(30, 45).
(4) Lubricate inside diameter (ID) lip of grease seals (31, 40) with the same
aircraft bearing grease used on tapered roller bearings.
(5) Apply a light coating of bearing lubricant to the ID of the tapered bearing
cups (120, 195) to prevent corrosion.
D. Preassemble tapered bearing cups (120, 195) into the wheel halves and screw
thread inserts (115) into the OB wheel half per the instructions in the Repair
section.

Page 702
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
B. IB Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines.

2.1 Assemble the IB Wheel Half Assembly


A. Cement or Grease Spacer (185) in Place on Wheel Hub Pilot.
(1) Wipe surface to be bonded with a cloth dampened with solvent, such as
methyl-ethyl-ketone per ASTM D740 or acetone. The surfaces to be
bonded must be clean and dry.
(2) Apply a thin even coating of 3M cement No. EC-847 or EC-776, or a small
amount of wheel bearing grease per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) to one
side of the spacer (185) (not ID or outside diameter (OD)).
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
(3) If using cement, immediately assemble the spacer to the wheel half with
an even pressure so that the bonded surfaces are in contact at all points.
Hold spacer under pressure until cement is set. Remove all seepage or
overflow of cement from surrounding areas. Surfaces other than the
bonded surfaces must be free of cement.
(4) If using grease, inspect the hub area after assembling the IB and OB
wheel halves to ensure the wheel spacer did not become dislodged.
B. Install Thermal Fuse Plug (180 or 182).
(1) Install prelubricated preformed packing (175 or 181) onto thermal fuse
plug and install into wheel. Tighten to torque value specified in Figure
801, but do not torque beyond that necessary to bottom.
NOTE: If thermal fuse plug (180) is installed and the wheel also contains
machined ports in the spoke area, machine thread plug (183)
must also be installed. Installation requirements are identical to
thermal fuse plug (182).
NOTE: If thermal fuse plug (182) is installed and the wheel also contains
fuse plug holes in the tubewell, blank plug (184) must also be
installed. Installation requirements are identical to thermal fuse
plug (180).

Page 703
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
2.1 Assemble the IB Wheel Half Assembly
C. Install Rotor Drive Keys (130).
(1) Apply LOCTITE 242R Removable Threadlocker to internal threads in rotor
drive key (130) bosses.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
(2) Install rotor drive keys onto wheel half.
(3) Insert machine screws (135) through rotor drive key and into the wheel.
Tighten machine screws to the torque value specified in Figure 801.
(4) As an option, machine screws may be locked in place by staking instead
of using Loctite compound. After the machine screws have been
tightened, stake each machine screw in place at the staking groove in the
rotor drive key.
D. Install Heat Shields (160).
(1) Insert heat shield retainer (155) into heat shield. Fit spacer (165) over
heat shield retainer. At the location marked with an “X,” place rotor
alignment guide (170) over spacer, aligning the hole in the alignment
guide with the hole in the spacer. The alignment guide flange protrudes
around the heat shield and toward the wheel hub.
NOTE: At operator option a second rotor alignment guide may be
installed diagonally opposite the first.
(2) Slide heat shield into place, aligning spacer, heat shield retainer, and, if
applicable, rotor alignment guide with attachment hole in wheel half.
Place screw (150) through retainer, spacer, rotor alignment guide, and
wheel half.
(3) Place correct amount of balance weights (145), as indicated at each
location, on screw and secure with nut (140). The weight of balance
weights required is stamped on the outer rim at the location where the
weight is installed. Examples of balance weight stamping: “5” indicates
0.50 ounce (14.2 g), “12” indicates 1.20 ounces (34.0 g). See Figure 101
for weight of balance weights. At locations where weights are not
indicated, place flat washer (100) between nut and wheel. Tighten nuts to
the torque value specified in Figure 801.
E. Static balance of wheel half is not necessary unless some rework has been
accomplished to disturb original balance. Refer to the Testing section to
determine if static rebalancing is required and for the static balancing
procedures. Installation of a second rotor alignment guide necessitates the
static balance of the wheel be rechecked.

Page 704
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 705
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
C. OB Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines.

3.1 Assemble the OB Wheel Half Assembly


A. Install tire valve assembly (5) in the wheel half as follows:
(1) Install prelubricated preformed packing (20) onto valve stem (25).
(2) Screw the valve stem into the wheel half at the location shown in
Figure 701 and tighten to the torque value specified in Figure 801.
(3) Valve core installation shall be per Tire and Rim Association guidelines.
B. Install prelubricated preformed packing (70) onto safety relief valve (75A) and
install into wheel at the location shown in Figure 701. Lubricate and tighten
safety relief valve to the requirements specified in Figure 801.
NOTE: To prevent thread galling, coat the threads of the safety relief valve with
corrosion inhibiting, solid film, air-cured lubricant conforming to
MIL-L-23398 or MIL-L-46147 prior to installation.
C. If the wheel half does not require rebalancing, attach torque warning plate (110)
and balance weights (90) to the wheel half as follows:
(1) At the location (indicated by an “X” stamped on the wheel flange when the
wheel half was disassembled) for attaching the torque warning plate,
insert screws (105) through the torque warning plate and then through the
wheel half.
(2) At other locations, install a flat washer (100) on screw before inserting the
screw through the wheel half.
(3) At all locations, add the correct amount of balance weight (90) as
indicated at each location and secure with nut (95). The weight of the
balance weights required is stamped on the outer rim at the location
where the weight is required. Examples of balance weight stamping: “5”
indicates 0.50 ounce (14.2 g), “12” indicates 1.20 ounces (34.0 g).
Tighten nuts to the torque value specified in Figure 801.
D. Static balance of wheel half is not necessary unless some rework has been
accomplished or optional equipment has been installed that has disturbed the
original balance. Refer to the Testing section to determine if static rebalancing
is required and for the static balancing procedures.

Page 706
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY

LAG-2935

Inflation Valve and Safety Relief Valve Installation


Figure 701

Page 707
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
D. Wheel Half Assembly Guidelines.

4.1 Assemble the Wheel Halves


WARNING: IF THE HUB MATING FACE OF EITHER THE IB OR OB WHEEL
HALF HAS BEEN REPAIRED AND A SHIM(S) IS REQUIRED, WHEEL
HALVES MUST BE INSPECTED TO ENSURE SHIM(S) ARE
PRESENT DURING ASSEMBLY.
A. If the wheel is being assembled with a tire, lubricate preformed packing (65) and
install in the packing groove of the IB wheel half assembly (190). Equalize the
preformed packing around the wheel and check to be sure that the preformed
packing is not twisted.
NOTE: If the wheel is being assembled without a tire, leave the preformed
packing in its envelope and attach it to the wheel for assembly at tire
installation.
NOTE: Dry talc or water-free lubricant may be used to aid installation of tire
during wheel assembly.
NOTE: Refer to Boeing’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual for information on tire
specification, inflation pressures, inspections, and general maintenance
procedures.
B. Place the IB wheel half assembly (190) on a tire changer or on a smooth, flat
surface and position the tire on the wheel half.
C. Position OB wheel half assembly (85) in tire, being particularly careful to avoid
misaligning or nicking preformed packing (65) or spacer (185). Align windows in
both wheel halves.
NOTE: Whenever possible, original wheel halves should be remated. Wheel
half pairs are identified by identical serial numbers located in the “C”
section of the flange of each wheel half.
D. Lubricate threads and bearing surfaces of machine bolts (60), recessed
washers (55), and self-locking nuts (50B) per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
CAUTION: INSTALL RECESSED WASHERS WITH THE RECESSED SIDE NEXT
TO SELF-LOCKING NUTS OR MACHINE BOLT HEADS.
E. Compress wheel halves and install machine bolts (60), recessed washers (55),
and self-locking nuts (50B) per the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01).
F. Inspect the assembly to ensure the spacer (185) is properly positioned.
G. With the tire installed on the wheel, tighten the machine bolt self-locking nuts
(50B) per the procedure defined in the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) using the
torque value specified in Figure 801 of this CMM.
H. If the machine bolts (60) were lubricated with lubricant per MIL-T-83483 or
MIL-PRF-83483 as defined in Figure 801, install the torque warning plate (111)
on the nut side of the OB wheel half on the spoke.

Page 708
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
E. Bearing Assembly Guidelines.

5.1 Assemble Bearings and Grease Seals


CAUTION: IT IS POSSIBLE THAT BEARINGS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED
CAN BE INSTALLED INTO THE WHEEL HALVES. INSTALL
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING (30) INTO THE OB WHEEL HALF
ASSEMBLY (85). INSTALL TAPERED ROLLER BEARING (45) INTO
THE IB WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY (190). NO OTHER BEARINGS
MAY BE USED IN THESE POSITIONS.
NOTE: There is a preferential installation direction for retaining ring (35). Lay
retaining ring on a flat surface and close the end gap. The ID of the
retaining ring will either cone up or down. The proper installation of the
retaining ring, to achieve maximum holding power, is for the apex (top)
of the cone to be towards the grease seal (40). If retaining ring is
installed the opposite way, only minimal force is required to dislodge
the retaining ring from the snap ring groove.
A. Install prelubricated tapered roller bearing and grease seal (31), if applicable,
into the hub of the OB wheel half. Secure in place. To aid in the installation of
the grease seal in the wheel, a light coat of the grease used on the bearing may
be applied to the OD of the seal.
B. Install prelubricated tapered roller bearing (45) and grease seal (40) into the hub
of the IB wheel half. The grease seal should be installed with the anti-rotation
nib facing outward to engage between the ends of the retaining ring (35). Install
the retaining ring using the wrap method. To aid in the installation of the grease
seal in the wheel, a light coat of the grease used on the bearing may be applied
to the OD of the seal.

Page 709
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ASSEMBLY
F. Inflating the Tire Guidelines.

6.1 Inflate the Tire with Dry Nitrogen


CAUTION: SAFETY RELIEF VALVE (75A) WILL RUPTURE AND RELEASE AIR
PRESSURE AT 375 - 450 PSI (26 - 31 BAR).
A. Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) to inflate tire.
G. Storage Instructions Guidelines.

7.1 Storage Instructions


A. Refer to the ALS SPM (ATA 32-49-01) for storage instructions.

Page 710
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
FITS AND CLEARANCES

Torque Value
IPL Pound-Inches (Newton-Meters)
Fig. & Wrench Torque
Item Minimum (Target/Nominal Torque Value is
No. Item Lubrication* Reusable Underlined)
1-5 Valve Assembly None N/A 175 ± 25 (19.8 ± 2.8)
1-50B Self-Locking Nuts AMS 2518 19 (2.1) Preliminary: 875 (98.9)
(With tire or
installed) MIL-T-5544 Final: 1750 ± 50 (197.7 ± 5.6)
1-50B Self-Locking Nuts MIL-T-83483 19 (2.1) Preliminary: 800 (90.4)
(With tire or
installed) MIL-PRF-83483 Final: 1600 ± 50 (180.8 ± 5.6)
1-75A Safety Relief MIL-L-23398 N/A 175 ± 25 (19.8 ± 2.8)
Valve or
MIL-L-46147
1-135 Machine Screws None N/A 70 ± 10 (7.9 ± 1.1)
1-95, Nut None 2 (0.2) 45 ± 5 (5.1 ± 0.6)
140
1-182 Thermal Fuse None N/A 80 ± 5 (9.0 ± 0.6)
Plug
1-183 Machine Thread MIL-L-23398 N/A 175 ± 25 (19.8 ± 2.8)
Plug or
MIL-L-46147
CAUTION: IF ANY BOLT OR NUT IS INADVERTENTLY TIGHTENED TO A VALUE THAT IS
10% OR MORE ABOVE THE SPECIFIED FINAL TORQUE VALUE, THEN THAT
BOLT AND NUT SHOULD BE SCRAPPED. ALSO, INSPECT MATERIAL UNDER
THE NUT AND BOLT FOR YIELDING.
NOTE: Torque wrenches must be accurate and capable of reproducing specified values
per Federal Specification GGG-W-686. Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS)
recommends torquing to the target/nominal value.
NOTE: Packing lubrication that contacts the threads of the inflation valve, safety relief
valve, and thermal fuse screws need not be removed before installation.
* When lubrication is specified, lubricate threads and bearing surfaces at each installation with
the specified compound. Use full strength. Do not dilute. Lubricants may be purchased from
lubrication vendors per the referenced MIL or AMS specifications identified above.
Table of Torque Values
Figure 801

Page 801
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
FITS AND CLEARANCES

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 802
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPEMENT
The following optional special tools and fixtures will facilitate the disassembly, repair, and
reassembly of the wheel half assembly.
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used.

Figure No. Tool No. Description Application


901 2558450 Heating Fixture, Wheel Hub Used to heat the hub of the wheel for
(240V, 1,200 Watts) replacement of the wheel tapered
bearing cups.
902 2558440 Driver, Tapered Bearing Used with a press to install and
Cup Installation and remove tapered bearing cups.
Removal (Outboard)
903 2558111 Driver, Tapered Bearing Used with a press to install and
Cup Installation and Removal remove tapered bearing cups.
(Inboard)
904 2558442 Support, Wheel Hub Used to support the wheel on the hub
during tapered bearing cup
installation and removal, thereby
preventing unnecessary side thrust
on the wheel spokes.
NOTE: For acquisition of special tools and fixtures, refer to Appendix A. Contact Aircraft Landing
Systems (ALS) to obtain tool detail drawings for use in locally-manufactured tooling.

Page 901
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT

Figure 901 Figure 902 Figure 903

Figure 904

Page 902
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPEMENT

4.75
(120.9)
0.56 (14.2) 3.75
(95.3)
1.88 (47.8) 0.25 (6.4)
0.18 (4.6)
0.06 (1.5) R
0.06 (1.5) 1.00
(25.4)

30°

4.00 3.88
4.918 - 4.923 DIA (101.6) (98.6) 4.44 DIA
(124.92 - 125.04) DIA DIA (112.8)
4.50 DIA 4.25
4.955 - 4.960 (114.3)
DIA (108.0)
(125.86 - 125.98)
DIA

2.50 (63.5) DIA BC


MIN U’CUT
1.25 (31.8) DIA THRU 0.06 (1.5) R MIN U’CUT
2-HL’S EQ. SPACED
MATERIAL:
MAKE FROM STEEL 4140 HEAT TREATED
TO ROCKWELL “C” 28 - 36

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-6171 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Driver, Tapered Bearing Cup Installation and Removal (Outboard), P/N 2558440
Figure 905

Page 903
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT

6.625
(168.28)
0.75
(19.1)
5.375
0.25 (6.4)
(136.53)
0.25 (6.4) 0.06 (1.5)

30°

5.190
4.50 4.75
(131.83) 5.792 - 5.797 DIA
(114.3) (121)
DIA (147.12 - 147.24)
DIA DIA

5.38
4.81
(136.7) 5.827 - 5.832 DIA
(122.2)
DIA (148.01 - 148.13)
DIA

2.60
DIA B.C 1.00
(66.0)
0.06 (1.5) R (25.4)
1.50 (38.1) DIA THRU 0.12 (3.0) R
2-HL’S EQ. SPACED MIN U’CUT 2.75
(69.9)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-6172 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Driver, Tapered Bearing Cup Installation and Removal (Inboard), P/N 2558111
Figure 906

Page 904
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPEMENT

6.75
4.50
(171.5)
(114.3)
DIA
0.24 - 0.23
A 0.38 (9.7)
(6.1 - 5.8)

6.06 DIA
5.44 DIA (153.9)
(138.2)

5.020 (127.51)
± 0.010 (0.25) DIA
± 0.010
5.880
DIA
(149.4)

0.03 (0.8) X 45°


A
THIS SIDE IS USED FOR 30°
OUTBOARD BEARING 0.03 (0.8) X 45°
1.50
CUP REMOVAL AND (38.1) THIS SIDE IS USED FOR
INSTALLATION INBOARD BEARING
SECTION A-A CUP REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION
MATERIAL:
MAKE FROM STEEL 4140 HEAT TREATED
TO ROCKWELL “C” 28 - 36

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-6173 MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Support, Wheel Hub, P/N 2558442


Figure 907

Page 905
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
SPECIAL TOOLS, FIXTURES, AND EQUIPMENT

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 906
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
1. This Illustrated Parts List (IPL) section illustrates, lists, and describes the procurable parts
required to comply with the instructions contained in the maintenance portion of this manual.
2. Parts are listed in order of disassembly, with the exception of attaching parts, and are grouped in
their respective subassemblies where applicable. An item number which carries an alpha
variant (Example 25A) identifies the part as an optional or alternate part. An item number
preceded by a dash (Example –25) is not illustrated except when it is the top item in the
figure-item column. The attaching parts are listed in the same column as the assembly or item
which they attach and are captioned “Attaching Parts”. The end of the list of attaching parts is
indicated by this symbol: ---*---.
3. Tire valve parts are listed in the “Part Number” column. The Aircraft Landing Systems (ALS) part
number and, when applicable, Military Standard (MS) numbers are listed in the “Nomenclature”
column. When ordering tire valve parts from ALS, they must be ordered by the ALS part
number. In the case of parts listed with multiple approved vendors, ALS reserves the right to
furnish vendor parts by ALS number without discrimination to the vendor.
4. When a vendor number other than the ALS part number is listed in the “Part Number” column,
the vendor code and the ALS code and part number appear in the “Nomenclature” column.
Paragraph 8. contains a list of the Commercial and Government Entity Codes in the IPL.
5. The “Effectivity Code” column is used when two or more configurations of an assembly are listed
in the same parts list. A code letter is assigned to each main assembly. All items that are
peculiar to a particular assembly are identified by the same code letter as the main assembly.
When parts are common to all assemblies, the “Effectivity Code” column is left blank.
6. The “Units per Assembly” column shows the quantity of the listed part at that location only. In
the case of multiple usage of a part, the quantity listed is not the total used in the final assembly.
7. Abbreviations used in this section are:
AR - As required
V - Commercial and Government Entity Code
8. Commercial and Government Entity Codes.
Code Name and Address
55284 Honeywell International Inc., Aircraft Landing Systems, 3520 Westmoor Street, South
Bend, Indiana 46628-1373, U.S.A., Telephone: (574) 231-2000, Fax: (574) 231-2334,
Website: www.HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.com.
Parts listed in Parts Price List should be ordered from Product Support Centers:
NOTE: When ordering vendor standard parts, use ALS part numbers rather than vendor numbers.
Honeywell International Inc., Aircraft Landing Systems, Product Support Center, 1730
North Topping, Kansas City, Missouri 64120, U.S.A., Telephone: (816) 231-8400, Fax:
(816) 231-2775, Website: www.HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.com and click on the
Contact ALS link.
Honeywell European Distribution Center (EDC), Honeywell DC Hangar 14/SPLVR,
Hangar 14 Schiphol East, 1117 ZL Amsterdam Schiphol Airport, The Netherlands,
Telephone: +31 (0) 20 648 2269 or +31 (0) 20 649 4183, Fax: +31 (0) 20 648 2299,
Email: HONEYWELL.EDC@HONEYWELL.COM. Website:
www.HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.com and click on the Contact ALS Link.
Page 1001
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
17875 Eaton Corporation, Air Controls Products Division, P.O. Box 241, 2564 Durham Road
Roxboro, North Carolina 27573-0241, U.S.A., Telephone: (336) 599-1141 or
(800) 368-9130 (U.S. only), Fax: (336) 503-6424, Website: www.aircontrols.eaton.com.
27783 Schrader-Bridgeport International Inc., 500 South 45th Street East, Muskogee,
Oklahoma 74403, U.S.A., Telephone: (800) 331-4062 or (918) 687-5427,
Fax: (918) 682-1635, Website: www.schrader-bridgeport.com.
56878 SPS Technologies, Aerospace Products Division, 301 Highland Avenue, Jenkintown,
Pennsylvania 19046, U.S.A., Telephone: (215) 572-3000, Fax: (215) 572-3193,
Website: www.spstech.com/aero/index.html.
60038 The Timken Company, 1835 Dueber Avenue, Southwest, P.O. Box 6932, Canton, Ohio
44706-0932, U.S.A., Telephone: (330) 438-3000, Fax: (330) 471-3810,
Website: www.timken.com.
73957 Groov-Pin Corporation, 1125 Hendricks Causeway, Ridgefield, New Jersey
07657-2105, U.S.A., Telephone: (201) 945-6780, Fax: (201) 945-8998,
Website: www.groove-pin.com.
79934 Tire and Rim Association, 175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150, Copley, Ohio 44313,
U.S.A., Telephone: (330) 666-8121, Fax: (330) 666-8340, Website: www.us-tra.org.
91816 Circle Seal Controls Inc., A Division of Circor International, 2301 Wardlow Circle,
P.O. Box 3300, Corona, California 92878, U.S.A., Telephone: (909) 270-6200,
Fax: (909) 270-6201, Website: www.circle-seal.com.
92215 Fairchild Fasteners, Customer Service Center, 3990 A Heritage Oak Court, Simi Valley,
California 93063-6711, U.S.A., Telephone: (800) 992-4444, Fax: (805) 527-0900,
Website: www.fairchildfasteners.com.
97928 Deutsch Fastener Corporation, 3969 Paramont Boulevard, Lakewood, California
90712-4193, U.S.A.

Page 1002
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST

50B

125B

75A

184
140
100 175
145 180

200B

WB-372F

Main Wheel Assembly Exploded View


Figure 1
Page 1003
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-1 2606671-1 WHEEL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
(737-200 Aircraft only)
–1 2606671-2 WHEEL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
(737-200/300/400/500)
–1 2606671-3 WHEEL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
(Service Configuration, refer to the
Description and Operation section)
5 TR761-03 . VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 2606691)
–5A VS827 . VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V17875) (V55284, 2606691)
–5B 6027 . VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V27783) (V55284, 2606691)
–5C 2606691 . VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
–5D 10-44 . VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V91816) (Optional tire fill/pressure
gauge)
10 TR-VC5 . . CAP, Valve (MS20813-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 172694)
–10A 637 . . CAP, Valve (MS20813-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V17875) (V55284, 172694)
–10B 2525 . . CAP, Valve (MS20813-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V27783) (V55284, 172694)
15 TR-C4 . . CORE, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 149598)
(MIL-V-27317)
–15A 402AH . . CORE, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V17875) (V55284, 149598)
(MIL-V-27317)
–15B 5230 . . CORE, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V27783) (V55284, 149598)
(MIL-V-27317)
–15C 149598 . . CORE, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(MIL-V-27317)
20 TR-RG6 . . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 2602195)
–20A 448 . . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V17875) (V55284, 2602195)

Page 1004
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-20B 732 . . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V27783) (V55284, 2602195)
–20C 2602195 . . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
25 TR761-02 . . STEM, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 2606690)
–25A VS827-1 . . STEM, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V17875) (V55284, 2606690)
–25B 6027-1 . . STEM, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V27783) (V55284, 2606690)
–25C 2606690 . . STEM, Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
R –26 151387 . . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(For service repair) (See
Figure 646)
30 27690* . BEARING, Tapered roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V60038) (V55284, 103S187,
superseded by P/N 2606294, use
until exhausted) (Outboard) (V55284,
2606294, supersedes
P/N 103S187)
31 2610036 . SEAL, Grease (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(Added by SB 2606671-32-028)
35 2606169-11 . RING, Retaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
40 2606693 . SEAL, Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
–41 2608896 . . WASHER, Grease seal nib repair . . . . . AR
45 596* . BEARING, Tapered roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V60038) (V55284, 103S205,
superseded by P/N 2606298, use
until exhausted) (V55284, 2606298,
supersedes P/N 103S205)
–50 LH3840T-9 DELETED
–50A 65270-918 DELETED
50B 2604374 . NUT, Self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
55 2602542 . WASHER, Recessed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
60 2602540 . BOLT, Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
65 2607266 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

* This P/N bearing, when ordered from ALS, meets Timken Performance Code 20629 (629 Code).
To obtain 629 Code bearings from Timken distributors, the 629 Code must be specified, otherwise
standard product may be shipped.
Page 1005
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-70 TR-RG6 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V79934) (V55284, 2602195)
–75 A3323-9 DELETED
75A 2605243 . VALVE, Safety relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
–80 D1002-2 DELETED
85 2606692 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY, . . . . . . . . . . . A,C 1
Outboard (Superseded by
P/N 2608058, use until exhausted)
(Permanently marked as
P/N 2606688 or 2607087)
–85A 2608058 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY, . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Outboard (Supersedes P/N 2606692)
(Superseded by P/N 2607949-1, use
until exhausted) (Permanently
marked as P/N 2607949)
–85B 2607949-1 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY, . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Outboard (Supersedes P/Ns 2608058
and 2606692) (Permanently marked
as P/N 2607949)
90 146287 . . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.12 oz) (3.40 g)
–90A 153230 . . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.21 oz) (5.95 g)
–90B 153237 . . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.41 oz) (11.62 g)
–90C 2606616 . . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.15 oz) (4.25 g)
–90D 2606715 . . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.29 oz) (8.22 g)
95 22FH1032 . . NUT, No. 10-32 (V56878) . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(V55284, 146204) (Superseded by
P/N NAS679A3, use until
exhausted)
–95A 1801-02 . . NUT, No. 10-32 (V56878) . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(V55284, 146204) (Superseded by
P/N NAS679A3, use until
exhausted)
R –95B NAS679A3 . . NUT, Self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Supersedes P/N 146204)

Page 1006
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-100 AN960-10 . . WASHER, Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Superseded by P/N
NAS1149F0363P, use until
exhausted)
–100A AN960-10L . . WASHER, Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Superseded by P/N
NAS1149F0332P, use until
exhausted)
–100B NAS1149F0363P . . WASHER, Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Supersedes P/N AN960-10)
–100C NAS1149F0332P . . WASHER, Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Supersedes P/N AN960-10L)
105 MS16998-31 . . SCREW, No. 10-32 by 1 inch . . . . . . . . . AR
(25.4 mm) (Superseded by
P/N NAS1351-3-16P, use until
exhausted)
–105A NAS1351-3-16P . . SCREW, No. 10-32 by 1 inch . . . . . . . . . AR
(25.4 mm) (Supersedes
P/N MS16998-31)
110 2606717 . . PLATE, Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(Torque warning)
111 2609691 . . PLATE, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(Applicable for Molylube lubricant on
bolts)
115 TH25028 . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(Standard) (V73957)
(V55284, 2600715, superseded by
P/N MS21209F4-20, use until
exhausted)
–115A H25028 . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(First oversize, service repair)
(V73957) (V55284, 2600829)
–115B 931C-4SE-0437 . . INSERT (V01556) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(V55284, 2604414) (Second
oversize, service repair)
(Superseded by P/N 2609312, use
until exhausted)

Page 1007
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-115C 701-7P . . RING, Key (lock) (V01556) . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(V55284, 2604415) (Must be used
with P/N 931C-4SE-0437)
(Superseded by P/N 2609312, use
until exhausted)
–115D 931CW-4SEP . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
0437 assembly (Second oversize, service
repair) (V55284, 2609312)
(Supersedes P/N 2604414,
2604415)
–115E MS21209F4-20 . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(Standard) (Supersedes
P/N 2600715) (Added by SIL 653)
R –115F 3891-4CN500 . . INSERT, Screw thread, Helicoil . . . . . . . AR
(For first oversize service repair)
R –115G 2391-4CN500 . . INSERT, Screw thread outer, Helicoil . . AR
(Twinsert for second oversize
service repair)
R –115H 4691-4CN464 . . INSERT, Screw thread inner, Helicoil . . AR
(Twinsert for second oversize
service repair)
120 27620* . . CUP, Tapered bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V60038) (V55284, 103S155,
superseded by P/N 2606275, use
until exhausted) (V55284, 2606275,
supersedes
P/N 103S155)
R –125 2601738 DELETED
–125A 2601739 DELETED
R 125B 2609877 . BUSHING, Bearing Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Service repair)
130 2606683 . KEY, Rotor drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ATTACHING PARTS
135 HT8132-2 . SCREW, Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
(V92215) (V55284, 2603158)
(Superseded by P/N 2614477, use
until exhausted)

* This P/N bearing, when ordered from ALS, meets Timken Performance Code 20629 (629 Code).
To obtain 629 Code bearings from Timken distributors, the 629 Code must be specified, otherwise
standard product may be shipped.
Page 1008
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-135A 106699 . SCREW, Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
(V56878) (V55284, 2603158)
(Superseded by P/N 2614477, use
until exhausted)
–135B BM33015 . SCREW, Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
(V97928) (V55284, 2603158)
(Superseded by P/N 2614477, use
until exhausted)
–135C 2610293 . SCREW, Machine, self-locking . . . . . . . . . 16
(Superseded by P/N 2614478, use
until exhausted)
–135D 2614477 . SCREW, Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
(Supersedes P/N 2603158)
–135E 2614478 . SCREW, Machine, self-locking . . . . . . . . . 16
(Supersedes P/N 2610293)
–136 1191-4CN-0375 . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(For Service Repair, first oversize)
–136A 8191-4CN-0375 . . INSERT, Screw thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(For Service Repair, second
oversize)
–––*–––
140 22FH1032 . NUT, No. 10-32 (V56878) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
(V55284, 146204) (Superseded by
P/N NAS679A3, use until exhausted)
–140A 1801-02 . NUT, No. 10-32 (V56878) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
(V55284, 146204) (Superseded by
P/N NAS679A3, use until exhausted)
–140B NAS679A3 . NUT, Self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
(Supersedes P/N 146204)
145 146287 . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.12 oz) (3.40 g)
–145A 153230 . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.21 oz) (5.95 g)
–145B 153237 . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.41 oz) (11.62 g)
–145C 2606616 . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.15 oz) (4.25 g)
–145D 2606715 . WEIGHT, Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(0.29 oz) (8.22 g)

Page 1009
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-150 MS16998-31 . SCREW, No. 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
by 1 in. (Superseded by
P/N NAS1351-3-16P, use until
exhausted)
–150A NAS1351-3-16P . SCREW, No. 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
by 1 in. (Supersedes
P/N MS16998-31)
155 2602801 . RETAINER, Heat shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
160 2606684 . SHIELD, Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 8
(Superseded by P/N 2608684, use
until exhausted)
–160A 2608684 . SHIELD, Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
(Supersedes P/N 2606684)
(Superseded by P/N 2609573, use
until exhausted)
–160B 2609573 . HEAT SHIELD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
(Heat shield permanently marked as
P/N 2608684) (Supersedes
P/N 2608684)
161 2609161-1 . . BUMPER, Rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
165 2604756 . SPACER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
170 2601116 . GUIDE, Rotor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1*
(Superseded by P/N 2611186, use
until exhausted)
–170A 2611186 . GUIDE, Rotor alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1*
(Supersedes P/N 2601116)
175 MS9068-009 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A,C 4
(Superseded by P/N AS3582-009,
use until exhausted)
–175A AS3582-009 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A,C 4
(Supersedes P/N MS9068-009)
180 2606937 . FUSE PLUG, Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 4
(351°F) (177°C)
181 MS9068-012 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
(Superseded by P/N AS3582-012,
use until exhausted)
–181A AS3582-012 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
(Supersedes P/N MS9068-012)

* Two rotor alignment guides may be used. Reference Assembly section, outline number 2.1, D.
Page 1010
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
R 1-181B 151890 . PACKING, Preformed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(For use with spoke fuse hole repair
bushing. See Figure 624)
182 2607542 . FUSE PLUG, Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B,C 4
(351°F) (177°C)
183 2608243 . PLUG, Machine thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 4
(Used in place of P/N 2607542)
184 2609223 . PLUG, Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 4
(Used in place of P/N 2606937)
185 2607015 . SPACER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
–186A 2610506-1 . SHIM, Wheel (First oversize) . . . . . . . . . . 1
–186B 2610506-2 . SHIM, Wheel (Second oversize) . . . . . . . 1
190 2606685 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . A 1
(Inboard) (Superseded by
P/N 2608245, use until exhausted)
(Permanently marked as
P/N 2606681 or 2607086)
–190A 2608245 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . A 1
(Inboard) (Supersedes P/N 2606685)
(Superseded by P/N 2607948-1, use
until exhausted) (Permanently
marked as P/N 2608207)
–190B 2608059 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . B 1
(Inboard) (Superseded by
P/N 2607948-1, use until exhausted)
(Permanently marked as P/N
2607948)
–190C 2607948-1 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . B 1
(Inboard) (Supersedes P/Ns
2606685, 2608245, and 2608059)
(Permanently marked as P/N
2607948)
–190D 2606685-1 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY, . . . . . . . . . . . C 1
Inboard (Service modified to
incorporate fuse plugs at the spoke
area; refer to the Description and
Operation section.) (Permanently
marked as P/N 2607086)

Page 1011
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST
UNITS
FIG. PART AIRLINE EFF. PER
ITEM NUMBER PART NO. NOMENCLATURE CODE ASSY.
1-190E 2608245-1 . WHEEL HALF ASSEMBLY, . . . . . . . . . . . C 1
Inboard (Applicable for S/Ns up to
B-1200. Service modified to
incorporate fuse plugs at the spoke
area; refer to the Description and
Operation section.) (Permanently
marked as P/N 2608207)
195 592XS* . CUP, Tapered bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
(V60038) (V55284, 103S206,
superseded by P/N 2606299, use
until exhausted) (V55284, 2606299,
supersedes P/N 103S206)
–200 2603779-1 DELETED
–200A 2603779-2 DELETED
200B 2609876 . BUSHING, Bearing bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR
(Service Repair) (Supersedes
P/Ns 2603779-1 and 2603779-2)

* This P/N bearing, when ordered from ALS, meets Timken Performance Code 20629 (629 Code).
To obtain 629 Code bearings from Timken distributors, the 629 Code must be specified, otherwise
standard product may be shipped.
Page 1012
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
The following is a list of vendor contact information.

CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
Repair  10601 0RZG3 Devcon
(Aluminum 30 Endicott Street
Putty F) Danvers, Massachusetts 01923-3712,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 933-8266 or
(978) 777-1100
Fax: (978) 774-0516
Website: www.devcon.com
Repair  EC-2214 OKHE3 3M Engineered Adhesives Division
Hi-Temp 3M Center, Building 220-7E-01
St. Paul, Minnesota 55144-1000, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 362-3550
Fax: (651) 733-9175
Website: www.3M.com
Repair  Hysol 33564 Henkel Loctite Aerospace
EA 934NA 2850 Willow Pass Road
(Epoxy Paste P.O. Box 312
Adhesive) Bay Point, California 94565–0031,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (925) 458-8000
Fax: (925) 458-8030
Website: www.loctiteaero.com
Repair  LPS 3 LPS Laboratories
(Heavy Duty 4647 Hugh Howell Road
Rust Inhibitor) P.O. Box 105052
Tucker, Georgia 30085-5052, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 241-8334 or
(770) 243-8800
Fax: (800) 543-1563 or
(770) 243-8899
Website: www.lpslabs.com
Repair  LOCTITE  638 05972 Henkel Loctite Corporation
Retaining 1001 Trout Brook Crossing
Compound Rocky Hill, Connecticut 06067-3910,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 562-8483 or
(860) 571-5100
Fax: (860) 571-5465
Website: www.loctite.com

Page A-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
Repair  Silicone Rubber Dow Corning Corporation
P.O. Box 994
Midland, Michigan 48686-0994, U.S.A.
Telephone: (989) 496-4400
Fax: (989) 496-6731
Or
Dow Corning Eurpose
Chaussee De La Hulpe 154
B-1770
Brussels, Belgium
Telephone: 02 6738069
Telex: 22530
GE Silicones
World Headquarters
Waterford, New York 12188, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 332-3390
Fax: (518) 233-2307
Website: www.gesilicones.com
Repair  Zinc Chromate Federal
Primer Specification
TT-P-1757
Repair,  EC-776 MIL-D-17951E OKHE3 3M Aerospace Central
Assembly 3211 East Chestnut Expressway
Springfield, Missouri 65802, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 235-2376
Fax: (417) 869-5219
Website: www.3M.com
Repair,  EC-847 (Rubber OKHE3 3M Engineered Adhesives Division
Assembly and Gasket 3M Center, Building 220-7E-01
Adhesive) St. Paul, Minnesota 55144-1000, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 362-3550
Fax: (651) 733-9175
Website: www.3M.com
Assembly  LOCTITE  242 05972 Henkel Loctite Corporation
(Removable 1001 Trout Brook Crossing
Threadlocker) Rocky Hill, Connecticut 06067-3910,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 562-8483 or
(860) 571-5100
Fax: (860) 571-5465
Website: www.loctite.com

Page A-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
Special Hanley-Smith Limited
Tools, 7 South Road
Fixtures, and Templefields Harlow
Equipment Essex CM20 2AP
England
Telephone: 44-1279-414446
Fax: 44-1279-635101
Special 06848 Honeywell Ground Support Equipment
Tools, Attention: Robert A. Battista
Fixtures, and 717 North Bendix Drive
Equipment South Bend, Indiana 46628, U.S.A.
Telephone: (574) 231-2706
Fax: (574) 231-4128
Email:
robert.battista@honeywell.com
Special Kim Supply Co. Inc.
Tools, 1604 Magda Drive
Fixtures, and Montpelier, Ohio 43543, U.S.A.
Equipment Telephone: (419) 485-8367
Fax: (419) 485-3545
IPL 91816 Circle Seal Controls Inc.
A Division of Circor International
2301 Wardlow Circle
P.O. Box 3300
Corona, California 92878, U.S.A.
Telephone: (909) 270-6200
Fax: (909) 270-6201
Website: www.circle-seal.com
IPL 97928 Deutsch Fastener Corporation
3969 Paramont Boulevard
Lakewood, California 90712-4193,
U.S.A.
IPL 17875 Eaton Corporation
Air Controls Products Division
2564 Durham Road
P.O. Box 241
Roxboro, North Carolina 27573-0241,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (336) 599-1141 or
(800) 368-9130 (U.S. only)
Fax: (336) 503-6424
Website: www.aircontrols.eaton.com

Page A-3
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
IPL 92215 Fairchild Fasteners
Customer Service Center
3990 A Heritage Oak Court
Simi Valley, California 93063-6711,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 992-4444
Fax: (805) 527-0900
Website: www.fairchildfasteners.com
IPL 73957 Groov-Pin Corporation
1125 Hendricks Causeway
Ridgefield, New Jersey 07657-2105,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (201) 945-6780
Fax: (201) 945-8998
Website: www.groove-pin.com
IPL 55284 Honeywell International Inc.
Aircraft Landing Systems
3520 Westmoor Street
South Bend, Indiana 46628-1373,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (574) 231-2000
Fax: (574) 231-2334
Website: www.
HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.com
Honeywell International Inc.
Aircraft Landing Systems
Product Support Center
1730 North Topping
Kansas City, Missouri 64120, U.S.A.
Telephone: (816) 231-8400
Fax: (816) 231-2775
Website: www.
HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.com
(click on the Contact ALS link)
Honeywell European Distribution Center
(EDC),
Honeywell DC Hangar 14/SPLVR,
Hangar 14 Schiphol East,
1117 ZL Amsterdam Schiphol Airport,
The Netherlands,
Telephone: +31 (0) 20 648 2269 or +31
(0) 20 649 4183,
Fax: +31 (0) 20 648 2299,
Email:
HONEYWELL.EDC@HONEYWELL.CO
M
Website:
www.HoneywellAircraftLandingSystems.
com and click on the Contact ALS Link.

Page A-4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
IPL 27783 Schrader-Bridgeport International Inc.
500 South 45th Street East
Muskogee, Oklahoma 74403, U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 331-4062 or
(918) 687-5427
Fax: (918) 682-1635
Website: www.schrader-bridgeport.com
IPL 56878 SPS Technologies
Aerospace Products Division
301 Highland Avenue
Jenkintown, Pennsylvania 19046,
U.S.A.
Telephone: (215) 572-3000
Fax: (215) 572-3193
Website:
www.spstech.com/aero/index.html
IPL 60038 The Timken Company
1835 Dueber Avenue, Southwest
P.O. Box 6932
Canton, Ohio 44706-0932, U.S.A.
Telephone: (330) 438-3000
Fax: (330) 471-3810
Website: www.timken.com
IPL 79934 Tire and Rim Association
175 Montrose West Avenue, Suite 150
Copley, Ohio 44313, U.S.A.
Telephone: (330) 666-8121
Fax: (330) 666-8340
Website: www.us-tra.org

Page A-5
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX A - VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
CMM
Section CMM Specification
Reference Reference Equivalence Code Vendor
Appendix B Hocking Pencil Krautkramer Inc.
Probe P/N U.S.A., Asia, Venezuela, Mexico, and
610-205-020 Canada
order from:
Krautkramer Inc.
50 Industrial Park Road
Lewiston, Pennsylvania 17044, U.S.A.
Telephone: (717) 242-0327
Fax: (717) 242-2606
Website: www.krautkramer.com
England, Scotland, and Ireland order
from:
Krautkramer UK
University of Warwick Science Park
Milburn Hill Road
Coventry, England
Telephone: 011-44-2476-690069
Fax: 011-44-2476-693032
France and Italy order from:
Krautkramer France
ZAC San Souci 68
Chemin Des Ormeaux
F-69760 Liminest
Lyon, France
Telephone: 011-33-47-217-9220
Fax: 011-33-47-847-5698
All other countries order from:
Krautkramer AGFA NDT GmbH,
Robert Bosch Strasse 3
50354 Hurth Germany
Telephone: 011-49-0-2233-6010
Fax: 011-49-0-2233-601402
Website: www.krautkramer.com
Appendix B Wheel Hub Curtis Industries Inc.
Reference R.D. #8, P.O. Box 48C, Department TR
Standards Kittanning, Pennsylvania 16201, U.S.A.,
Telephone: (724) 545-8333
Fax: (724) 545-8334
Website: www.curtisindustries.com
VM Products, Incorporated,
11208 62nd Avenue East,
Puyallup, Washington 98373, U.S.A.
Telephone: (253) 841-2939

Page A-6
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Tabular Definition of Repair Requirements.

Topic Description
General Tabular  Appendix B is presented using a tabular format to organize the
Overview inspection instructions. A breakdown of the tabular format is as
follows:
- Column 1 identifies the outline number for the inspection
instructions summarized in the table.
- Column 2 identifies the instructions that should be followed to
inspect the specified part of subassembly.
Breakdown of  Appendix B paragraphs are broken down as follows:
Appendix B Paragraph Page
Paragraphs
2.A. Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
2.B. Transducer and Couplant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3.A. General Wheel Hub Inspection Guidelines . . . . . . B-4
3.B. Inspection Procedure for Detection of
Radial Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
3.C. Inspection Procedure for Detection of
Axial Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16

Page B-1
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Special Tools and Materials.
NOTE: Select from the following to perform ultrasonic inspection.
A. Test Equipment.
Ultrasonic Test Equipment Model Epoch II by Panametrics, USN 50/52 by Krautkramer
Branson, Stavely Sonic 136, Sonatest 230, or equivalent.
Frequency Range Capability 1.0 MHz to 10 MHz (Minimum).
Equipment Type Pulse echo with audio and visual alarm capability.
Examination Method Contact.
Mode Straight beam/angle beam.
Scanning Method Manual.

B. Transducer and Couplant.


Transducer Model Any brand name is acceptable, providing specifications
identified below are met.
Transducer Type Top-mounted micro-dot connection, pencil case style,
nominal 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) length. (Example: immersion
style in most manufacturers’ catalogs.)
Frequency 5.0 or 10 MHz (5 MHz preferred).
Crystal Size 0.25 inches (6.4 mm) in diameter.
Element Material Ceramic.
Couplant Ultragel II, Soundclear, X30S (30-40 weight), or equivalent
water-soluble couplant.

Page B-2
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

This page intentionally left blank.

Page B-3
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
3. Ultrasonic Wheel Hub Inspection Procedure.
A. General Wheel Hub Inspection Guidelines.

1.0 General Inspection Guidelines


1.1 Fatigue cracks propagating from the bearing bore shoulder radius of some inboard (IB)
wheel halves have resulted in hub separations. The cracks have the potential to
propagate in the directions illustrated in Figure B-1. The crack initiation points are
masked by the installed bearing cup when performing basic visual inspection procedures.
The installed bearing cup also precludes the use of fluorescent penetrant or eddy current
inspection techniques. The following inspection guidelines have been developed to allow
inspection of the hub area using ultrasonic inspection techniques without need to remove
the bearing cup. Figure B-1 also illustrates placement of the required inspection fixturing
and transducers used to locate cracks from both failure modes.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor information.
NOTE: The following guidelines are intended to provide basic information for
establishment of non-destructive ultrasonic testing procedures to properly
examine the wheel hub for cracks. Formal inspection procedures must be
developed and maintained by each operator using certified personnel in
accordance with the latest revision of NAS-410.

Page B-4
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

HOLDING BLOCK
HOLDING BLOCK PLATE FLUSH
FLUSH AGAINST AGAINST WHEEL HUB
WHEEL HUB

TRANSDUCER

BEARING CUP

TRANSDUCER
INBOARD WHEEL HUB

HOLDING BLOCK
ASSEMBLY
BLOCK NO. 1
SHOWN
POTENTIAL CRACK
HOLDING BLOCK NO. 3 INDICATION PROPAGATING
AXIALLY FROM BEARING POTENTIAL CRACK
BORE SHOULDER RADIUS INDICATION PROPAGATING
RADIALLY FROM BEARING
BORE SHOULDER RADIUS

LAG-4789A

Wheel Hub Crack Orientation and Ultrasonic Scan Fixture Orientation


Figure B-1

Page B-5
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
B. Inspection Procedure for Detection of Radial Cracks.

2.0 Radial Cracks from Bearing Bore Shoulder Radius Inspection.


NOTE: Perform the following instructions when inspecting wheel hub for potential cracks
that propagate radially from the bearing bore shoulder radius (see Figure B-1).
2.1 Obtain or fabricate calibration and wheel hub reference standards.
A. Equipment Calibration Standard Commercially available aluminum IIW2, IIW1,
DSC, and miniature shear wave blocks are
examples of acceptable calibration standards.
B. Wheel Hub Reference Standard Reference standard to be fabricated from a
one-third, one-half, or full section of the IB wheel
half. Standard must be fabricated from a wheel
hub that is free of cracks and visual damage. A
minimum of two EDM notches shall be
machined into the hub reference standard as
defined per Figure B-2.
C. Wheel Hub Reference Standard Operators are free to select a vendor to
Supplier fabricate reference standards. Operators will be
required to supply the vendor a representative
wheel hub/half from which the reference
standard will be fabricated.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for vendor
information.
2.2 Obtain or fabricate holding and positioning fixtures.
A. Transducer Holding Blocks Transducer holding blocks must be
manufactured per Figures B-3 and B-4 using
sonic-grade Plexiglass or Lucite. These blocks
will hold the transducer at the appropriate
inspection angles.
B. Transducer Positioning Fixture Fabricate a positioning plate and spacers as
defined per Figure B-5. The positioning plate
and spacers will locate the transducer at the
appropriate inspection depths.

Page B-6
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

INBOARD WHEEL HUB PLACE NOTCHES TOWARD


WHEEL CALIBRATION GAGE CENTER OF HUB SECTION
MACHINE FROM 1/3 OR 1/2 HUB
SECTION OR USE FULL HUB
2.00 (50.8)

0.200 (5.08) $ 0.050 (1.27)


TO CENTER OF EDM NOTCH

EDM NOTCHES
LENGTH: 0.140 $ 0.002 (3.56 $ 0.05)
DEPTH: 0.040 $ 0.002 (1.02 $ 0.05)
WIDTH: 0.004 $ 0.002 (0.1 $ 0.05)
AT A 45º ANGLE TO MAIN AXIS OF
WHEEL HUB

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4790A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Reference Standard Machining Instructions


Figure B-2

Page B-7
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

A
MATERIAL: SONIC-GRADE PLEXIGLASS OR LUCITE

PERMANENTLY MARK
BLOCK IDENTIFICATION 3.00 (76.2)
AS SHOWN 737 BLOCK # 1

BLOCK NO. 1
P/N 2606671
P/N 2609801

0.70 (17.8) 1.50 (38.1)


0.510 - 0.490
45° (12.95 - 12.45)
0.136 (3.45) DIA TO DEPTH SHOWN
0.25 (6.4) DIA x 90° COUNTERSINK
0.164-32 UNC-3A THD 0.50 (12.7)
DEEP MIN. TWO LOCATIONS
1.05 - 1.03 (26.7 - 26.2)
A
2.70 (68.6)
0.30 (7.6)

0.655 - 0.645
NYLON SET (16.64 - 16.38)
SECTION A-A 30° 0.40 (10.2)
SCREW

DRILL THRU 0.136 (3.45) TO INTERSECT


3.73 - 3.70 0.380 (9.65) DIA HOLE AS SHOWN
0.380 (9.65) DIA (94.7 - 94.0) 0.25 (6.4) DIA x 90° COUNTERSINK
RADIUS 0.164-32 UNC-3A THD THRU

DRILL THRU 0.020 (0.51) TO


INTERSECT 0.380 (9.65) DIA HOLE AS SHOWN
0.65 (16.5) MIN DRILL
FLAT BOTTOM HOLE TO
MAX DEPTH ALLOWED TOLERANCES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
WITHOUT BREAKING ANGULAR $ 1/2°
THROUGH BACK EDGE LINEAR (INCLUDING HOLES) $ 0.020 (0.50)

BREAK ALL EDGES

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4791A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Transducer Holding Block #1


Figure B-3

Page B-8
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

A
MATERIAL: SONIC-GRADE PLEXIGLASS OR LUCITE

PERMANENTLY MARK
3.00 (76.2) BLOCK IDENTIFICATION
AS SHOWN

P/N 2609801
P/N 2606671
737 BLOCK # 2
BLOCK NO. 2
1.50 (38.1) 0.70 (17.8)
0.510 - 0 .490
(12.95 - 12.45) 45°
0.136 (3.45) DIA TO DEPTH SHOWN
0.25 (6.4) DIA x 90° COUNTERSINK
0.164-32 UNC-3A THD 0.50 (12.7)
DEEP MIN. TWO LOCATIONS
1.05 - 1.03 (26.7 - 26.2)
A
2.70 (68.6)
0.30 (7.6)

0.655 - 0.645
(16.64 - 16.38) NYLON SET
0.40 (10.2) 30° SECTION A-A
SCREW

DRILL THRU 0.136 (3.45) TO INTERSECT


0.380 (9.65) DIA HOLE AS SHOWN 3.73 - 3.70
(94.7 - 94.0) 0.380 (9.65) DIA
0.25 (6.4) DIA x 90° COUNTERSINK
0.164-32 UNC-3A THD THRU RADIUS

DRILL THRU 0.020 (0.51) TO INTERSECT


0.380 (9.65) DIA HOLE AS SHOWN
0.65 (16.5) MIN DRILL
FLAT BOTTOM HOLE TO
MAX DEPTH ALLOWED
TOLERANCES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED WITHOUT BREAKING
ANGULAR $ 1/2° THROUGH BACK EDGE
LINEAR (INCLUDING HOLES) $ 0.020 (0.50)

BREAK ALL EDGES

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4792A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Transducer Holding Block #2


Figure B-4

Page B-9
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

0.125 (3.2) MIN R


4 LOCATIONS

2.00 (50.8)

0.40
(10.2) 0.200 (5.08) DRILL THRU
2 LOCATIONS
TO ALIGN WITH HOLES IN
HOLDING BLOCK

0.30 (7.6)
2.70 (68.6)

3.00 (76.2)

MATERIAL - ALUMINUM, PLEXIGLASS OR EQUIVALENT, 0.200 (5.08) THICK MIN


HUB POSITIONING PLATE

0.37 - 0.50 0.37 - 0.50


(9.4 - 12.7) DIA (9.5 - 12.7) DIA

0.200 (5.08)
DRILL THRU 0.200 (5.08)
ON CENTER DRILL THRU
ON CENTER
0.57 (14.5) 0.50 (12.7)

MATERIAL – ALUMINUM, PLEXIGLASS OR EQUIVALENT


BUSHINGS

TOLERANCES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED


LINEAR (INCLUDING HOLES) $ 0.020 (0.50)

BREAK ALL EDGES

HARDWARE:
PLATE MOUNTING SCREWS - 8-32 UNC-3A TO SUIT (2 REQUIRED)
TO ENGAGE MIN 10 THREADS IN HOLDING BLOCK

RETAINING SET SCREW - 8-32 UNC-3A NYLON, 0.250 - 0.375 (6.35 - 9.53) LONG

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4793A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Positioning Plate and Spacers


Figure B-5

Page B-10
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2.3 Perform equipment calibration.
A. Calibrate ultrasonic flaw detector equipment for shear wave metal travel distance
using acceptable standard, transducer, and couplant as defined previously.
NOTE: If couplant or transducer is changed during inspection process, the
calibration procedure must be repeated.
B. Select the 10.0 or 5.0 inch (254 or 127 mm) range on the ultrasonic unit when
calibrating the ultrasonic equipment for shear wave. After calibration, and being
dependent upon selected ultrasonic unit’s capability, select either the 2.0 inch (50.8
mm) or 2.5 inch (63.5 mm) range on the ultrasonic unit.
2.4 Establish inspection reference dB level using hub reference standard.
A. Obtain required holding blocks, positioning plates, spacers, couplant, transducer,
and reference standard.
B. Install transducer used during equipment calibration into the mounting hole of a
holding block allowing excess couplant to escape through vent hole. Secure
transducer using a nylon set screw.
C. Apply couplant to the outside diameter of the standard near a selected EDM notch
reflector. Position shoe assembly to obtain response from the EDM notch (see
Figure B-1).
NOTE: Ensure that the couplant interface is optimum and that no air bubbles are
visible through the clear holding block.
D. Scan the selected EDM notch at a speed that provides a clear indication. Optimize
the amplitude response from the reference standard to 80% of full screen height.
The minimum ratio between the amplitude of the reference flat bottom hole and any
noise factor shall be 4 to 1.
E. Record all ultrasonic equipment settings for future reference, as required.
2.5 Establish final ultrasonic machine settings for wheel hub scanning.
A. Following initial setup, increase reference gain by 6 dB for scanning purposes.
B. Establish gate at 50% full screen height and establish appropriate gate positions.
C. Activate both audible and visual alarms.

Page B-11
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2.6 Prepare and scan wheel hub for detection of potential cracks.
A. Ensure wheel half hub surfaces are free of dirt, oil, scale, loose paint, nicks and
other conditions that will degrade the inspection.
B. Verify bearing cup is properly seated in wheel hub as defined in Check section.
C. Apply couplant to the wheel hub outside diameter (OD) in zone to be covered by
the positioning block when the inspection is performed.
D. Complete scan of wheel hub using spacers and the transducer positioning fixture
instructions provided in (1) through (4). As defined, four separate scans are
required. Each scan should cover 360 degrees of the wheel hub periphery in both
a clockwise and counterclockwise direction. Prior to each scan, ensure that the
couplant interface is optimum and that no air bubbles are visible through the clear
holding block. Attempt to scan surface at scanning speed noted earlier. The goal
is to achieve 100% coverage of the wheel hub periphery in the zone defined by the
holding and positioning fixtures. Mark all areas of interest.
(1) Scan #1
 Positioning Space Length - 0.50 inches (12.7 mm)
 Transducer Holding Block - #1
(2) Scan #2
 Positioning Space Length - 0.57 inches (14.5 mm)
 Transducer Holding Block - #1
(3) Scan #3
 Positioning Space Length - 0.50 inches (12.7 mm)
 Transducer Holding Block - #2
(4) Scan #4
 Positioning Space Length - 0.57 inches (14.5 mm)
 Transducer Holding Block - #2
E. Perform post calibration check upon completion of each wheel hub examination
using the wheel hub reference standard. If EDM notch reflector amplitude varies
more than ± 3 dB from the original reference dB setting, recalibrate and re-examine
wheel hub.
F. Quarantine all wheel hubs with areas of interest marked from ultrasonic inspection
procedures.

Page B-12
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2.7 Accept or reject wheel halves with marked areas of interest based on the following
criteria.
A. If any indications are identified exceeding the gate limits, optimize signal
freehanded (without use of positioning fixture), and subtract the 6 dB gain used for
scanning purposes. At the reference dB level, again optimize signal and mark area
of interest with a suitable marker.
B. Wheel halves with amplitude indications below 50% of the established reference dB
setting may be returned to service providing that the identified indication was
optimized by scanning in different directions to ensure the 50% level is never
exceeded.
C. Wheel halves with amplitude indications above 100% of the established reference
dB setting should be retired from service.
D. Wheel hubs with amplitude indications between 50% and 100% of the established
reference dB setting should be inspected as follows:
(1) Remove bearing cup.
(2) If hub was thermal sprayed for repair, machine thermal spray down to the
bare aluminum parent metal of the wheel half.
(3) Thoroughly clean the inner diameter bearing bore surface.
(4) Examine the area with 5x to 10x magnification and white light (100 fc
minimum). If any cracks are identified, retire wheel half.
(5) If no indications of cracks are identified with visual examination, conduct an
eddy current hand-held scan of the area of interest. Any crack indication
identified is cause for wheel half retirement.
NOTE: Use a commercial standard with an EDM notch of 0.020 inch
(0.51 mm) in depth as the suggested sensitivity standard for hand
scanning.
NOTE: Fluorescent penetrant may be used to inspect the bearing bore
surface for cracks with the understanding that potential cracks must
be open to the surface for this technique to provide any degree of
sensitivity. Bearing cup rotational marks or smeared metal may
mask surface cracks in the bearing bore of the wheel hub when
using fluorescent penetrant. Machining and etching of damage or
smeared metal in the bearing bore within the limits of the Repair
section will be required in order to allow detection of cracks using
fluorescent penetrant techniques.

Page B-13
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2.7 Accept or reject wheel halves with marked areas of interest based on the following
criteria.
(6) For wheel bearing bores that had thermal spray removed, if no crack
indications are found using eddy current, perform ultrasonic inspection again
on the wheel hub.
(7) If, following repeated inspections, the ultrasonic inspection method continues
to produce indications that are between 50% and 100% of the established
reference dB setting and the crack indications are not verified through visual
or eddy current inspection methods, ALS recommends that the wheel be
retired. However, the final decision for continued serviceability can be made
by each operator in consultation with a Level III Non-Destructive Test (NDT)
inspector based on the documented service history of the questionable wheel
half.

Page B-14
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

This page intentionally left blank.

Page B-15
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE
C. Inspection Procedure for Detection of Axial Cracks.

3.0 Inspection Procedure for Detection of Axial Cracks


NOTE: Perform the following instructions when inspecting wheel hub for potential cracks
that propagate axially from the bearing bore shoulder radius (see Figure B-1).
Fatigue cracks propagating axially occur less frequently and, therefore, this
inspection may be performed at operator option.
3.1 Obtain or fabricate holding block and contact transducer.
A. Fabricate transducer holding block as illustrated in Figure B-6, or ensure that any
locally fabricated template will position transducer at desired location as identified
per Figure B-7.
B. Select a 5 or 10 MHz contact transducer with a 0.250 - 0.375 inch (6.35 - 9.53 mm)
crystal diameter.
3.2 Perform equipment calibration as follows:
A. Calibrate ultrasonic flaw detector equipment for horizontal linearity using pulse echo
technique.
B. Cross-section thickness of the examination area will be approximately 0.90 inch
(22.9 mm). The examination location is 2.00 to 2.20 inches (50.8 to 55.9 mm) from
the end of the wheel hub as illustrated in Figure B-2. The reference standard used
to examine the hub for radial cracks per Figure B-7 may be used to establish
reference levels and crack detection gate settings. Set gate to 40% of FSH to
intersect any back wall signals from 0.40 to 0.80 inch (10.2 to 20.3 mm).
3.3 Perform inspection.
A. Place transducer mounting fixture over the wheel hub to be inspected. See Figure
B-7 for correct orientation. Insert transducer through mounting hole until it contacts
the wheel hub OD. While holding the transducer in place, remove the mounting
fixture and secure the transducer with set screw. For each wheel hub to be
inspected, ensure the transducer contacts the wheel hub OD. Depending on wheel
geometry, adjust placement of transducer.
B. Ensure wheel half hub surfaces are free of dirt, oil, scale, loose paint, nicks, and
other conditions that will degrade the inspection.
C. Apply couplant to the wheel hub OD in the inspection area.
D. While maintaining contact between the transducer and the wheel hub OD, conduct
a minimum of eight equally-spaced spot examinations covering the periphery of the
hub. Continuous scanning of the hub periphery is also acceptable, with the
understanding that accelerated wear to the transducer face will be a factor.
Establish a backwall technique, whereas if there is a recognized loss of backwall
signal or any signal that alarms the established gate, further evaluation per outline
numbers 3.4, A. and 3.4, B. is recommended.
E. Perform post calibration check upon completion of each wheel hub examination to
validate ultrasonic equipment settings.
F. Quarantine all wheel hubs with areas of interest marked from ultrasonic inspection
procedures.

Page B-16
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 1.00 (25.4)

737 BLOCK # 3 PERMANENTLY


0.25 (6.4) 1.25 P/N 2606671 MARK BLOCK
0.15 P/N 2609801 IDENTIFICATION
(31.8)
(3.8) AS SHOWN

2.00 $ 0.10
(50.8 $ 2.5)

2.75 (69.9)

0.25 (6.4) 0.50 (12.7)

DRILL HOLE THRU AS SHOWN


TO DIA THAT ACCOMMODATES DRILL THRU 0.136 (3.45) TO
SELECTED TRANSDUCER OD INTERSECT HOLE AS SHOWN
0.40 (10.2) MAX 0.25 (6.4) DIA x 90° COUNTERSINK
0.164-32 UNC-3A THD THRU

MATERIAL: ALUMINUM, PLEXIGLASS, OR EQUIVALENT HARDWARE: RETAINING SET SCREW


8-32 UNC-3A NYLON
BREAK ALL EDGES LENGTH TO FIT

TOLERANCES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED


LINEAR (INCLUDING HOLES) $0.020 (0.50)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4819A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Transducer Holding Block #3


Figure B-6

Page B-17
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05
COMPONENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
737-200/300/400/500 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY, P/N 2606671
APPENDIX B - ULTRASONIC WHEEL HUB INSPECTION PROCEDURE

TRANSDUCER

0.90 (22.9)

0.15 (3.8)

0.80 (20.3) MAX

INSPECTION AREA
POTENTIAL CRACK
1.90 (48.3)

2.10 (53.3)

DIMENSIONS ARE PROVIDED IN INCHES WITH


LAG-4794A MILLIMETER CONVERSIONS IN PARENTHESES

Wheel Hub Axial Crack Inspection Area and Transducer Orientation


Figure B-7

3.4 Until each operator validates this suggested inspection method and has confidence in the
inspection results, ALS recommends the following be performed to further validate that
cracks are present in the areas of interest.
A. Visually inspect areas of interest. If visual examination does not detect crack, the
bearing cup may be removed to facilitate additional visual examinations. If no
indications of cracks are identified with visual examination, conduct an eddy current
hand-held scan of the area of interest per outline number 2.7, D.(5). Any crack
indication identified is cause for wheel half retirement.
B. If following repeated inspections and removal of any thermal sprayed material, the
crack is not validated through visual or eddy current inspection methods, ALS
recommends that the wheel half be retired. However, the final decision for
continued serviceability can be made by each operator in consultation with a Level
III NDT inspector based on the documented service history of the questionable
wheel half.

Page B-18
32-40-09
Copying, use or disclosure of information on this page is subject to proprietary restrictions.
Oct 14/05

You might also like